Revision history Table of revisions
Date Changed Rev
March 2018 Minor updates 0901
September 2017 Corrected performance curves for K2 Pumps 0812
August 2017 Corrected typo 0811
April 2017 Update the TOC 0810
March 2017 add K2 Frame 0809
July 2016 Fan Drive Control configuration-corrected G and H model code tables 0808
July 2016 Fan Drive Control configuration-included G and H model code tables 0807
June 2016 Various edits - Fan Drive Control 0806
April 2016 Various edits - Fan Drive Control 0805
March 2016 Add Fan Drive Control 0804
March 2015 Add E Frame ETL control and Angle Sensor HC
October 2014 Add ETL control and Angle Sensor HB
July 2014 Danfoss layout HA
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
2 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
General Information
Overview..............................................................................................................................................................................................8
Design...................................................................................................................................................................................................8
Benefits.................................................................................................................................................................................................8
Typical applications.........................................................................................................................................................................9
The Series 45 product family........................................................................................................................................................9
Load sensing open circuit system............................................................................................................................................10
Servo Control Orifice.....................................................................................................................................................................11
Servo Control Orifice Principle.............................................................................................................................................11
Servo Control Orifice Performance.................................................................................................................................... 12
Pacing Factor..............................................................................................................................................................................13
Hydraulic Controls.........................................................................................................................................................................13
Pressure compensated controls..........................................................................................................................................13
Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................13
Pressure compensated system characteristics.........................................................................................................14
Typical applications for pressure compensated systems.....................................................................................14
Remote pressure compensated controls.........................................................................................................................14
Remote pressure compensated system characteristics........................................................................................15
Typical applications for remote pressure compensated systems..................................................................... 16
Load sensing controls.............................................................................................................................................................16
LS control with bleed orifice............................................................................................................................................16
Integral PC function............................................................................................................................................................17
Load sensing system characteristics............................................................................................................................ 17
Electric Controls..............................................................................................................................................................................17
Electric Proportional Controls (EPC)...................................................................................................................................17
PLUS+1
®
Compliance......................................................................................................................................................... 17
Electric Proportional Control Principle........................................................................................................................17
Electric Proportional Control Response/Recovery..................................................................................................18
Electric Proportional Control Characteristic – Normally Closed.........................................................................18
Electric Proportional Control Characteristic – Normally Open...........................................................................20
Electric On-Off Controls..........................................................................................................................................................22
PLUS+1 Compliance...........................................................................................................................................................22
Electric On-Off Control Principle....................................................................................................................................22
Electric On-Off Control Response/Recovery..............................................................................................................22
Electric On-Off Control Performance vs. Ambient Temperature Characteristic...........................................23
Electric On-Off Control Characteristic – Normally Closed.................................................................................... 23
Electric On/Off Control Characteristic – Normally Open.......................................................................................24
Electric dump valve PC/LS controls....................................................................................................................................25
Electronic Torque Limiting Controls (ETL).......................................................................................................................26
PLUS+1 Compliance...........................................................................................................................................................26
Electric Torque Limiting Control Principle.................................................................................................................26
Electronic Torque Limiting Control Characteristic..................................................................................................27
Fan Drive Control (FDC)..........................................................................................................................................................28
PLUS+1 Compliance...........................................................................................................................................................28
Fan Drive Control Principle .............................................................................................................................................28
Fan Drive Control System Characteristics.................................................................................................................. 29
Unintended Applications for Fan Drive Control Systems.....................................................................................29
Fan Drive Control characteristic - Normally Closed ...............................................................................................29
Solenoid data – Normally closed...................................................................................................................................31
Fan Drive Control configuration....................................................................................................................................33
NC Fan Drive Control 3D Views......................................................................................................................................33
Angle Sensor....................................................................................................................................................................................33
PLUS+1 Compliance................................................................................................................................................................33
Angle Sensor Principle............................................................................................................................................................34
Angle Sensor Characteristics................................................................................................................................................34
J & F-Frame (45-90cc) Angle Sensor Identification Convention:........................................................................35
E-Frame (100-147cc) Angle Sensor Identification Convention:..........................................................................36
Angle sensor electrical specifications............................................................................................................................... 38
Angle Sensor Calibration....................................................................................................................................................... 38
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Contents
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 3
Angle Sensor Functionality...................................................................................................................................................38
Charge Pump Circuits...................................................................................................................................................................38
Example Circuit #1....................................................................................................................................................................38
Example Circuit #2....................................................................................................................................................................39
Operating parameters..................................................................................................................................................................40
Fluids.............................................................................................................................................................................................40
Viscosity........................................................................................................................................................................................40
Temperature...............................................................................................................................................................................40
Inlet pressure..............................................................................................................................................................................41
Case pressure............................................................................................................................................................................. 41
Pressure ratings.........................................................................................................................................................................42
Speed ratings............................................................................................................................................................................. 42
Duty cycle and pump life.......................................................................................................................................................42
Speed, flow, and inlet pressure............................................................................................................................................42
Design parameters........................................................................................................................................................................ 43
Installation...................................................................................................................................................................................43
Filtration.......................................................................................................................................................................................43
Reservoir...................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Fluid velocity.............................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Shaft loads...................................................................................................................................................................................44
Bearing life.................................................................................................................................................................................. 45
Mounting flange loads............................................................................................................................................................45
Estimating overhung load moments.................................................................................................................................45
Auxiliary mounting pads........................................................................................................................................................46
Input shaft torque ratings......................................................................................................................................................47
Understanding and minimizing system noise...............................................................................................................47
Understanding and minimizing system instability...................................................................................................... 47
LS System Over-Signaling......................................................................................................................................................48
Sizing equations.............................................................................................................................................................................48
Frame K2
Design................................................................................................................................................................................................ 49
Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................. 50
Order Code.......................................................................................................................................................................................50
Performance K2-25C.....................................................................................................................................................................56
Performance K2-30C.....................................................................................................................................................................57
Performance K2-38C.....................................................................................................................................................................58
Performance K2-45C.....................................................................................................................................................................59
Hydraulic Controls.........................................................................................................................................................................60
Pressure Compensated Controls.........................................................................................................................................60
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls........................................................................................................................61
Load Sensing Pressure Compensated Controls.............................................................................................................62
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice /Pressure Compensated........................................................................ 63
Electric Controls..............................................................................................................................................................................64
Connectors..................................................................................................................................................................................64
Continuous Duty Operating Range................................................................................................................................... 64
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed........................................................................................................................................64
Solenoid Data - Normally Open...........................................................................................................................................64
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.............................................................65
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls............................................................... 66
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls................................................. 67
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls....................................................68
Normally Closed Fan Drive Control....................................................................................................................................69
Input Shafts......................................................................................................................................................................................70
Installation Drawings....................................................................................................................................................................72
Axial Ported Endcap.................................................................................................................................................................72
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions................................................................................................................ 73
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports..........................................................................................................................73
Radial Ported Endcap O-ring Boss Ports...........................................................................................................................74
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions..............................................................................................................75
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Contents
4 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Front Mounting Flange - SAE-B two bolt.........................................................................................................................75
Auxiliary Mounting Pads........................................................................................................................................................76
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad........................................................................................................................................76
SAE-B auxiliary mounting pad........................................................................................................................................76
SAE-A Fixed flange..............................................................................................................................................................77
Auxiliary Mounting Pad - Running Cover...................................................................................................................77
Electric solenoid, left side.................................................................................................................................................78
Fan drive control..................................................................................................................................................................78
Displacement Limiter................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Frames L and K
Design................................................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................. 81
Order code........................................................................................................................................................................................81
Performance L25C......................................................................................................................................................................... 87
Performance L30D.........................................................................................................................................................................88
Performance K38C.........................................................................................................................................................................89
Performance K45D.........................................................................................................................................................................90
Hydraulic Controls.........................................................................................................................................................................91
Pressure Compensated Controls.........................................................................................................................................91
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls........................................................................................................................91
Load Sensing/Pressure Compensated Controls............................................................................................................92
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice /Pressure Compensated........................................................................ 93
Electric Controls..............................................................................................................................................................................94
Connector....................................................................................................................................................................................94
Continuous Duty Operating Range................................................................................................................................... 95
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed........................................................................................................................................95
Solenoid Data - Normally Open...........................................................................................................................................95
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.............................................................95
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls............................................................... 96
Normally Closed Electric Proportional Controls with PC and LS Compensation...............................................97
Normally Open Electric Proportional Controls with PC and LS Compensation.................................................99
Input shafts....................................................................................................................................................................................101
Installation drawings..................................................................................................................................................................102
Axial Ported Endcap..............................................................................................................................................................102
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions..............................................................................................................103
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports........................................................................................................................103
Radial Ported Endcap O-ring Boss Ports........................................................................................................................ 104
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View.......................................................................................................................................104
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions........................................................................................................... 105
Front Mounting Flange - SAE-B two bolt.......................................................................................................................105
Auxiliary Mounting Pads......................................................................................................................................................106
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad.....................................................................................................................................106
SAE-B auxiliary mounting pad......................................................................................................................................106
Auxiliary Mounting Pad - Running Cover.................................................................................................................107
Electric Solenoid, Left Side..................................................................................................................................................107
Electric Solenoid, Right Side...............................................................................................................................................107
Displacement limiter..................................................................................................................................................................108
Frame J
Design..............................................................................................................................................................................................109
Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................................110
Order code..................................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Performance J45B........................................................................................................................................................................120
Performance J51B........................................................................................................................................................................121
Performance J60B........................................................................................................................................................................122
Performance J65C....................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Performance J75C....................................................................................................................................................................... 124
Hydraulic Controls.......................................................................................................................................................................125
Pressure Compensated Controls......................................................................................................................................125
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Contents
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 5
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls..................................................................................................................... 126
Load sensing/Pressure compensated Controls...........................................................................................................127
Load sensing Control with Bleed Orifice/ Pressure Compensated...................................................................... 128
Electric Controls........................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Connectors............................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Continuous Duty Operating Range.................................................................................................................................129
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed......................................................................................................................................129
Solenoid Data - Normally Open........................................................................................................................................129
Fan Drive Control Solenoid Data - Normally Closed..................................................................................................130
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.......................................................... 130
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.............................................................131
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls...............................................132
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls................................................. 133
Normally Closed Electric Torque Limiting Control with Pressure Compensation Controls........................135
Normally Closed Fan Drive Control ................................................................................................................................ 136
Input shafts....................................................................................................................................................................................137
Installation drawings..................................................................................................................................................................140
Axial Ported Endcap..............................................................................................................................................................140
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions..............................................................................................................141
Right Fan Drive Control........................................................................................................................................................142
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports........................................................................................................................142
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View.......................................................................................................................................143
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions........................................................................................................... 144
Right Angle Sensor Position Installation Dimensions...............................................................................................145
Front Mounting Flange........................................................................................................................................................146
Auxiliary mounting pads.....................................................................................................................................................147
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad (integrated)............................................................................................................ 147
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad (non-integral)........................................................................................................ 148
SAE-B auxiliary mounting pad......................................................................................................................................149
SAE-C auxiliary mounting pad..................................................................................................................................... 149
Running cover....................................................................................................................................................................150
Radial Endcap Clockwise.....................................................................................................................................................150
Radial Endcap Counterclockwise..................................................................................................................................... 151
Axial Endcap Clockwise........................................................................................................................................................152
Axial Endcap Counterclockwise........................................................................................................................................152
Displacement limiter..................................................................................................................................................................152
Frame F
Design..............................................................................................................................................................................................154
Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................................155
Order code..................................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Performance F74B.......................................................................................................................................................................161
Performance F90C.......................................................................................................................................................................162
Hydraulic Controls.......................................................................................................................................................................163
Pressure Compensated Controls......................................................................................................................................163
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls..................................................................................................................... 163
Load Sensing/Pressure Compensated Controls..........................................................................................................164
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice/Pressure Compensated.......................................................................165
Electric Controls........................................................................................................................................................................... 166
Connectors............................................................................................................................................................................... 166
Continuous Duty Operating Range.................................................................................................................................167
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed......................................................................................................................................167
Solenoid Data - Normally Open........................................................................................................................................167
Fan Drive Control Solenoid Data - Normally Closed..................................................................................................167
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.......................................................... 167
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.............................................................168
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls...............................................169
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls................................................. 170
Normally Closed Electric Torque Limiting Control with Pressure Compensation Controls........................172
Normally Closed Fan Drive Control................................................................................................................................. 173
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Contents
6 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Input shafts....................................................................................................................................................................................174
Installation drawings..................................................................................................................................................................175
Axial Ported Endcap..............................................................................................................................................................175
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions..............................................................................................................175
Right Fan Drive Control........................................................................................................................................................176
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports........................................................................................................................176
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View.......................................................................................................................................177
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions........................................................................................................... 178
Right Angle Sensor Position Installation Dimensions...............................................................................................179
Front Mounting Flange........................................................................................................................................................180
Axial Endcap Clockwise........................................................................................................................................................182
Radial Endcap Counterclockwise..................................................................................................................................... 183
Axial Endcap Clockwise........................................................................................................................................................183
Axial Endcap Counterclockwise........................................................................................................................................183
Displacement limiter..................................................................................................................................................................183
Frame E
Design..............................................................................................................................................................................................185
Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................................186
Order code..................................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Performance E100B.....................................................................................................................................................................193
Performance E130B.....................................................................................................................................................................194
Performance E147C.................................................................................................................................................................... 195
Hydraulic Controls.......................................................................................................................................................................196
Pressure Compensated Controls......................................................................................................................................196
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls..................................................................................................................... 196
Load Sensing/Pressure Compensated............................................................................................................................197
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice/Pressure Compensated.......................................................................198
Electric Controls........................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Connectors............................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Continuous Duty Operating Range.................................................................................................................................200
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed......................................................................................................................................200
Solenoid Data - Normally Open........................................................................................................................................200
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.......................................................... 200
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls.............................................................201
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls...............................................202
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls................................................. 204
Normally Closed Electric Torque Limiting Control with Pressure Compensation Controls........................205
Input shafts....................................................................................................................................................................................207
Installation drawings..................................................................................................................................................................208
Axial Ported Endcap..............................................................................................................................................................208
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions..............................................................................................................209
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions........................................................................................................... 210
Right Angle Sensor Position Installation Dimensions...............................................................................................211
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View.......................................................................................................................................212
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports........................................................................................................................212
Front Mounting Flange........................................................................................................................................................213
Endcap Dimensions...............................................................................................................................................................214
Auxiliary mounting pads.....................................................................................................................................................215
Displacement Limiters...............................................................................................................................................................217
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Contents
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 7
Overview
Series 45 is a complete family of high performance variable displacement, axial piston pumps. Each frame
is designed to exceed the demanding work function requirements of the mobile equipment marketplace.
Each frame within the Series 45 family is uniquely designed to optimize performance, size, and cost.
Design
High Performance
•
Displacements from 25 cm³ - 147 cm³ [1.53 - 8.97 in3/rev]
•
Speeds up to 3600 rpm
•
Pressures up to 310 bar [4495 psi]
•
Variety of control system options including load sensing and pressure compensated
Latest Technology
•
Customer-driven using quality function deployment (QFD) and design for manufacturability (DFM)
techniques
•
Optimized design maximizes efficiency and quiet operation
•
Computer-modeled castings to optimize inlet conditions for maximum pump speed
•
Compact package size minimizing installation space requirements
•
Heavy-duty tapered roller bearings for long life
•
Single piece rigid housing to reduce noise and leak paths
•
Integrated controls for high speed response and system stability
Reliability
•
Designed to rigorous standards
•
Proven in both laboratory and field
•
Manufactured to rigid quality standards
•
Long service life
•
Significantly fewer parts
•
No gasket joints
•
Robust input shaft bearings to handle large external shaft loads
•
Integrated gauge ports for monitoring operating conditions
Benefits
Reduced Installation Costs
•
Through-drive capability for multi-circuit systems
•
Range of mounting flanges, shafts and porting options for ease of installation
•
Compact size minimizes installation space requirements
•
Help meet engine emission standards
•
Reduce engine size by managing power usage more effectively
Reduce Operating Costs
•
Optimize machine power usage to maximize fuel economy
•
Simple design reduces service requirements
•
Heavy duty taper roller shaft bearings provide long service life
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
8 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Increased Customer Satisfaction
•
Reduced noise for operator comfort
•
High performance increases productivity
Reduced Heat Load on Cooling System
•
High efficiency reduces hydraulic heat generation
•
Allows for smaller cooling packages
Typical applications
•
Cranes
•
Telescopic handlers
•
Forklift trucks
•
Wheel loaders
•
Sweepers
•
Backhoe loaders
•
Forestry and agricultural machinery
•
Fan drives
•
Paving Machines
•
Mining Equipment
•
Mowers
•
Dozers
•
Drilling Machines
•
Mini-Excavators
•
Other Applications
The Series 45 product family
Basic units
The series 45 family of open circuit, variable piston pumps, offers a range of displacements from 25 to 147
cm³/rev [1.53 to 8.97 in3/rev]. With maximum speeds up to 3600 rpm and continuous operating
pressures up to 310 bar [4495 psi], product selection is easily tailored to the flow and pressure
requirements of individual applications.
K2 Frame J Frame F Frame E Frame
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 9
General performance specifications for the series 45 pump family
Pump Displacement Speed Pressure Theoretical flow
(at rated speed)
Mounting
Continuous Max. Min. Cont. Max.
Frame Model cm3 in3 min-1 (rpm) min-1
(rpm)
min-1
(rpm)
bar psi bar psi US gal/min l/min Flange
Frame L L25C 25 1.53 3200 3600 500 260 3770 350 5075 21.0 80.0 SAE B - 2 bolt
L30D 30 1.83 3200 3600 500 210 3045 300 4350 25.4 96.0 SAE B - 2 bolt
Frame K K38C 38 2.32 2650 2800 500 260 3770 350 5075 26.6 100.7 SAE B - 2 bolt
K45D 45 2.75 2650 2800 500 210 3045 300 4350 31.5 119.3 SAE B - 2 bolt
Frame K2 on
page 49
K2-25C 25 1.53 3450 3750 500 260 3771 350 5076 22.0 84.2 SAE B - 2 bolt
K2-30C 30 1.83 3200 3450 500 25.4 96.0 SAE B - 2 bolt
K2-38C 38 2.32 2900 3050 500 28.1 106.4 SAE B - 2 bolt
K2-45C 45 2.75 2900 3050 500 33.28 126.0 SAE B - 2 bolt
Frame J J45B 45 2.75 2900 3360 500 310 4495 400 5800 33.3 126.0 SAE B 2-bolt
SAE C 2 and 4-bolt
J51B 51 3.11 2700 3240 500 310 4495 400 5800 36.4 137.7 SAE B 2-bolt
SAE C 2 and 4-bolt
J60B 60 3.66 2600 3120 500 310 4495 400 5800 41.2 156.0 SAE B 2-bolt
SAE C 2 and 4-bolt
J65C 65 3.97 2500 3000 500 260 3770 350 5075 42.9 162.6 SAE B 2-bolt
SAE C 2 and 4-bolt
J75C 75 4.58 2400 2880 500 260 3770 350 5075 47.5 180.0 SAE B 2-bolt
SAE C 2 and 4-bolt
Frame F F74B 74 4.52 2400 2800 500 310 4495 400 5800 46.9 177.6 SAE B 2-bolt
SAE C 4-bolt
F90C 90 5.49 2200 2600 500 260 3770 350 5075 52.3 198 SAE B 2-bolt
SAE C 4-bol
Frame E E100B 100 6.10 2450 2880 500 310 4495 400 5800 64.7 245.0 SAE C 4-bolt
E130B 130 7.93 2200 2600 500 310 4495 400 5800 75.5 286.0 SAE C 4-bolt
E147C 147 8.97 2100 2475 500 260 3770 350 5075 81.5 308.7 SAE C 4-bolt
Load sensing open circuit system
The pump receives fluid directly from the reservoir through the inlet line. A screen in the inlet line
protects the pump from large contaminants. The pump outlet feeds directional control valves such as
PVG-32’s, hydraulic integrated circuits (HIC), and other types of control valves. The PVG valve directs
pump flow to cylinders, motors and other work functions. A heat exchanger cools the fluid returning
from the valve. A filter cleans the fluid before it returns to the reservoir.
Flow in the circuit determines the speed of the actuators. The position of the PVG valve determines the
flow demand. A hydraulic pressure signal (LS signal) communicates demand to the pump control. The
pump control monitors the pressure differential between pump outlet and the LS signal, and regulates
servo pressure to control the swashplate angle. Swashplate angle determines pump flow.
Actuator load determines system pressure. The pump control monitors system pressure and will decrease
the swashplate angle to reduce flow if system pressure reaches the PC setting. A secondary system relief
valve in the PVG valve acts as a back-up to control system pressure.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
10 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Pictorial circuit diagram
P109124
K2 Frame Series 45
open circuit axial
piston pump with
load sensing control
Reservoir
Filter
Heat exchanger
System pressur e
Servo pressur e
Actuator pressur e
Load sense pressur e
Actuator retur n
Suction / case drain /
system retur n
Double-ac ting cylinder
Bi-directional
gear moto r
PVG 32
mulit-sec tion
load
sensing
contro l
valve
Servo Control Orifice
Servo Control Orifice Principle
Series 45 controls offer an optional servo control orifice (not available with Pressure Compensation only
Controls) available to aid in tuning system performance. The optional servo control orifice restricts flow
to and from the servo system in the pump, effectively pacing the motion of the servo system.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 11
Servo Control Orifice Performance
The use of the Servo Control Orifice will provide additional pacing to the pump, while the response of the
pump to pressure spikes remains unaffected. The Pressure Compensation Function response and
recovery, as well as the Load Sense Function response and recovery are shown below, and outline the
relative impact in response and recovery of the Servo Control Orifices. Note that these graphs are meant
as a generic comparison only, and that unique effects on response and recovery behavior for each
specific frame are shown later in this section.
P108 664E
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
System Pressure (bar)
Time
Relative Servo Control Orifice Performance
Generic PC Response and Recovery
Input Speed=1800rpm, Temperature=49°C, PC Setting=210Bar, LS Setting=20Bar
1.0mm Servo
Control Orifice
0.8mm Servo
Control Orifice
Without Servo
Control Orifice
0
50
100
150
200
250
System Pressure (bar)
Time
Relative Servo Control Orifice Performance
Generic LS Response and Recovery
Input Speed = 1800rpm, Temperature=49 C, PC Setting=310Bar, LS Setting=30Bar
0.8mm Servo
Control Orifice
1.0mm Servo
Control Orifice
Without Servo
Control Orifice
P108 665E
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
12 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
We recommend that systems experiencing instability use a Servo Control Orifice. Start with the largest
size orifice available, and work down to the smaller size until the system is satisfactorily tuned. All Fan-
Drive systems should start with a 0.8mm Servo Control Orifice if possible. Systems including motors are
more likely to require the Servo Control Orifice option.
Pacing Factor
Use of a Servo Control Orifice adds a pacing factor to each Series 45 Frame, impacting the behavior of the
pumps reactivity. This pacing factor can be multiplied by the specific Frame/Displacement/Control
selection’s response and recovery times, to determine the final paced response and recovery times.
Unique response and recovery times can be found in each frame-specific chapter, in the desired control
section. The paced response and recovery relationship is shown below.
Response (Damped)= Response (Specific Disp.Control) *Pacing Factor
Recovery (Damped)= Recovery (Specific Disp.Control) *Pacing Factor
Pacing Factors are unique to each orifice size, and can impact each frame differently. Below are the
Pacing Factors for each Servo Control Orifice Size by frame.
Frame Pacing Factors - Servo Control Orifice
1.0 mm Servo Control Orifice 0.8 mm Servo Control Orifice
PC Response PC Recovery LS Response LS Recovery PC Response PC Recovery LS Response LS Recovery
E-Frame
*
1
(No Effect)
2.3 2.0 2.0 1
(No Effect)
3.2 2.6 2.6
F-Frame
*
2.3 2.0 2.0 3.2 2.6 2.6
J-Frame
*
2.3 2.0 2.0 3.2 2.6 2.6
K2-Frame 2.3 2.0 2.0 3.2 2.6 2.6
K-Frame
**
2.3 2.3 2.3 3.7 3.1 3.1
L-Frame
**
2.3 2.3 2.3 3.7 3.1 3.1
*
PC Response from 160 bar to 210 bar, PC Recovery from 210 bar to 160 bar at 1800 rpm: LS Response from 230 bar to 30 bar, LS Recovery from 30 bar
to 230 bar at 1800 rpm.
**
** PC Response from 160 bar to 210 bar, PC Recovery from 210 bar to 160 bar at 1800 rpm: LS Response from 160 bar to 20 bar, LS Recovery from 20
bar to 160 bar at 1800 rpm.
Hydraulic Controls
Pressure compensated controls
Operation
The PC control maintains constant system pressure in the hydraulic circuit by varying the output flow of
the pump. Used with a closed center control valve, the pump remains in high pressure standby mode at
the PC setting with zero flow until the function is actuated. This condition is often called a dead head
condition.
Typical operating curve
0
0
Q max
Pressure
Fl
ow
P101 166E
PC setting
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 13
Simple closed-center circuit
P101 965
Once the closed center valve is opened, the PC control senses the immediate drop in system pressure
and increases pump flow by increasing the swashplate angle. The pump continues to increase flow until
system pressure reaches the PC setting. If system pressure exceeds the PC setting, the PC control reduces
the swashplate angle to maintain system pressure by reducing flow. The PC control continues to monitor
system pressure and changes swashplate angle to match the output flow with the work function
pressure requirements.
If the demand for flow exceeds the capacity of the pump, the PC control directs the pump to maximum
displacement. In this condition, actual system pressure depends on the actuator load.
Each section includes control schematic diagrams, setting ranges, and response / recovery times for each
control available. Response is the time (in milliseconds) for the pump to reach zero displacement when
commanded by the control. Recovery is the time (in milliseconds) for the pump to reach full displacement
when commanded by the control. Actual times can vary depending on application conditions.
It is recommended that a relief valve be installed in the pump outlet for additional system protection
Pressure compensated system characteristics
•
Constant pressure and variable flow
•
High pressure standby mode when flow is not needed
•
System flow adjusts to meet system requirements
•
Single pump can provide flow to multiple work functions
•
Quick response to system flow and pressure requirements
Typical applications for pressure compensated systems
•
Constant force cylinders (bailers, compactors, refuse trucks)
•
On/off fan drives
•
Drill rigs
•
Sweepers
•
Trenchers
Remote pressure compensated controls
The remote PC control is a two-stage control that allows multiple PC settings. Remote PC controls are
commonly used in applications requiring low and high pressure PC operation.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
14 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Typical operating curve
0
0
Q max
Pressure
Fl
ow
P101 969E
PC setting
Remote PC setting
Closed center circuit with remote PC
P101 966
The remote PC control uses a pilot line connected to an external hydraulic valve. The external valve
changes pressure in the pilot line, causing the PC control to operate at a lower pressure. When the pilot
line is vented to reservoir, the pump maintains pressure at the load sense setting. When pilot flow is
blocked, the pump maintains pressure at the PC setting. An on-off solenoid valve can be used in the pilot
line to create a low-pressure standby mode. A proportional solenoid valve, coupled with a
microprocessor control, can produce an infinite range of operating pressures between the low pressure
standby setting and the PC setting.
It is recommended that a relief valve be installed in the pump outlet for additional system protection.
Each section includes control schematic diagrams, setting ranges, and response / recovery times for each
control available. Response is the time (in milliseconds) for the pump to reach zero displacement when
commanded by the control. Recovery is the time (in milliseconds) for the pump to reach full displacement
when commanded by the control. Actual times can vary depending on application conditions.
Size the external valve and plumbing for a pilot flow of 3.8 l/min [1 US gal/min].
Remote pressure compensated system characteristics
•
Constant pressure and variable flow
•
High or low pressure standby mode when flow is not needed
•
System flow adjusts to meet system requirements
•
Single pump can provide flow to multiple work functions
•
Quick response to system flow and pressure requirements
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 15
Typical applications for remote pressure compensated systems
•
Modulating fan drives
•
Anti-stall control with engine speed feedback
•
Front wheel assist
•
Road rollers
•
Combine harvesters
•
Wood chippers
Load sensing controls
Operation
The LS control matches system requirements for both pressure and flow in the circuit regardless of the
working pressure. Used with a closed center control valve, the pump remains in low-pressure standby
mode with zero flow until the valve is opened. The LS setting determines standby pressure.
Typical operating curve
0
0
P101 968E
PC setting
Flow
Pressure
Q max
Load sensing circuit
P101 967
Most load sensing systems use parallel, closed center, control valves with special porting that allows the
highest work function pressure (LS signal) to feed back to the LS control. Margin pressure is the difference
between system pressure and the LS signal pressure. The LS control monitors margin pressure to read
system demand. A drop in margin pressure means the system needs more flow. A rise in margin pressure
tells the LS control to decrease flow.
LS control with bleed orifice
The load sense signal line requires a bleed orifice to prevent high-pressure lockup of the pump control.
Most load-sensing control valves include this orifice. An optional internal bleed orifice is available, for use
with control valves that do not internally bleed the LS signal to tank.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
16 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Integral PC function
The LS control also performs as a PC control, decreasing pump flow when system pressure reaches the PC
setting. The pressure compensating function has priority over the load sensing function.
For additional system protection, install a relief valve in the pump outlet line.
Load sensing system characteristics
•
Variable pressure and flow
•
Low pressure standby mode when flow is not needed
•
System flow adjusted to meet system requirements
•
Lower torque requirements during engine start-up
•
Single pump can supply flow and regulate pressure for multiple circuits
•
Quick response to system flow and pressure requirements
Electric Controls
Electric Proportional Controls (EPC)
PLUS+1
®
Compliance
All Series 45 Electric controls have met and passed the Danfoss PLUS+1
®
compliance standard testing,
and as such, this Series 45 control is PLUS+1
®
compliant. PLUS+1
®
compliance blocks are available on the
Danfoss website, within the PLUS+1
®
Guide section.
Electric Proportional Control Principle
The Electric Proportional Control consists of a proportional solenoid integrated into a Remote Pressure
Compensated control. This control allows the pump to be operated at any pressure limit between the
Load Sense and Pressure Compensation settings by varying the current sent to the solenoid.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 17
Reference individual frame sections for the margin (LS) setting vs low pressure standby relationship.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. This relationship is available in the electric proportional controls section for each frame.
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, use a minimum 15bar LS setting to enhance system
stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20bar LS setting is
recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric Proportional Control Response/Recovery
S45 Electric Proportional Controls require the use of a servo control orifice, and are available with two
possible servo control orifice options. The servo control orifice is used to enhance system stability, as well
as dampen the pump reactiveness. A smaller orifice diameter will add dampening to the pump
reactiveness, while a larger orifice will allow quicker pump reaction. Fan-Drive applications, as well as
systems with the pump supplying motors, are recommended to use the 0.8mm diameter orifice to
enhance system stability.
Module “G” Options for Electric Proportional Controls
Frame “E” - 0.8mm Orifice “F” - 1.0mm Orifice
All Frames
• •
Specific Electric Proportional Control Response/Recovery times are shown for the available servo control
orifice options in the control section within each specific frame section. These times represent the
response from 100bar to 200bar, and recovery from 200bar to 100bar. As the upper pressure approaches
the PC setting, the PC function will begin to assist in clipping pressure overshoots during the pump’s
response, and will decrease the response times of the pump to equal those of the PC response.
Electric Proportional Control Pressure vs. Flow Characteristic
The Electric Proportional Controls continuous duty operating temperature range is shown below; this
guideline should be followed as well as the maximum current limitations. Note that rated voltage refers
to either a 12V or 24V coil. Under high temperature conditions, current required to operate the solenoid
increases.
Continuous Duty Operating Temperature
50
60
70
80
90
100
-40
100
Percent of Rated Voltage (%)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
P108 415E
-30
-20
-10
0
60
80
10
20
30
40
50
70
90
110
120
Operating Range
Electric Proportional Control Characteristic – Normally Closed
When an electric current is sent to the Normally Closed configuration control, the pump pressure
decreases proportional to an increase in current. When the load in the system changes, the pump will
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
18 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
adjust its displacement to maintain the pressure demanded by the controlling current. This control is
especially useful for fan-drives, due to the direct relationship between fan-speed and pump pressure.
Due to the nature of Electric Proportional Controls, the relationship between current and pump pressure
is unique for each individual PC/LS pressure setting combination. The relationship between different PC
settings and different LS settings on the Pressure vs. Current Characteristic curve are shown below. The
hydraulic schematic for the Normally Closed Electric Proportional control is shown below as well.
Operating Pressure vs. Input Current (N.C. EPC)
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
System Pressure (Bar)
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
Current proportion I/I max
310 Bar PC, 10 Bar LS
310 Bar PC, 20 Bar LS
310 Bar PC, 30 Bar LS
260 Bar PC, 20 Bar LS
210 Bar PC, 20 Bar LS
P108 657E
Solenoid Data – Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Maximum Current 1800 mA 920 mA
Inrush Current 1700 mA 800 mA
Coil Resistance @ 20°C [70°F] 7.1 Ω 28.5 Ω
PWM Range 200-300 Hz
PWM Frequency (preferred) 250 Hz
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) IP67 IP67
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) with mating connector IP69K IP69K
Operating Temperature Consistent with Pump Limits:
-40°C (-40°F) to 104°C (220°F)
The available Normally Closed Electric Proportional Controls for the Series 45 are shown below. The
allowable Pressure Compensator (PC) and Load Sense (LS) pressure settings are provided for each frame
in their respective sections.
Electric Proportional Controls Options – Normally Closed Frame
Code Description L K
K2
J F E
AH Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
12VDC) Left
• • • •
AL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
24VDC) Left
• • • •
AV Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
12VDC) Right
• • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 19
Electric Proportional Controls Options – Normally Closed Frame
AK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
24VDC) Right
• • •
BH Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
BL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
BM Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
BK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
EM Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
12VDC)
• •
EN Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,
24VDC)
• •
Notes:
1. Left = E-Frame: CW Only, F-Frame: CW Only, J-frame: CW Axial, CCW Radial
2. Right = E-Frame: CCW Only, F-Frame: CCW Only, J-frame: CCW Axial, CW Radial
3. K/L Frame Controls are not rotation dependent
4. K2 Frame electric controls are limited only for Left orientation and up to 260 Bar
Electric Proportional Control Characteristic – Normally Open
When an electric current is sent to the normally open configuration control, the pump pressure increases
proportional to an increase in current. When the load in the system changes, the pump will adjust its
displacement to maintain the pressure demanded by the controlling current. This control is especially
useful for fan-drives, due to the direct relationship between fan-speed and pump pressure.
Due to the nature of Electric Proportional Controls, the relationship between current and pump pressure
is unique for each individual PC/LS pressure setting combination. The relationship between different PC
settings and different LS settings on the Pressure vs. Current Characteristic curve are shown below. The
hydraulic schematic for the Normally Open Electric Proportional control is shown below as well.
Operating Pressure vs. Input Current (N.O. EPC)
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
System Pressure (Bar)
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
260 Bar PC, 20 Bar LS
210 Bar PC, 20 Bar LS
310 Bar PC, 20 Bar LS
310 Bar PC, 30 Bar LS
310 Bar PC, 10 Bar LS
P108 658E
Current proportion I/I max
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
20 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Solenoid Data – Normally Open
Voltage 12V 24V
Maximum Current 1500 mA 665 mA
Inrush Current 1700 mA 800 mA
Coil Resistance @ 20°C [70°F] 7.1 Ω 28.5 Ω
PWM Range 200-300 Hz
PWM Frequency (preferred) 250 Hz
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) IP67 IP67
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) with mating connector IP69K IP69K
Operating Temperature Consistent with Pump Limits:
-40°C (-40°F) to 104°C (220°F)
The available Normally Open Electric Proportional Controls for the Series 45 are shown below. The
allowable Pressure Compensator (PC) and Load Sense (LS) pressure settings are provided for each frame
in their respective sections. Note that for Electric Proportional Controls, the Load Sense setting describes
the Low Pressure Standby value, not margin.
Electric Proportional Controls Options – Normally Open Frame
Code Description L K
K2
J F E
AX Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
12VDC) Left
• • • •
CL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
24VDC) Left
• • • •
AW Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
12VDC) Right
• • •
CK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
24VDC) Right
• • •
BX Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
DL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
BW Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
DK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
EK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
12VDC)
• •
EL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,
24VDC)
• •
Notes:
1. Left = E-Frame: CW Only, F-Frame: CW Only, J-frame: CW Axial, CCW Radial
2. Right = E-Frame: CCW Only, F-Frame: CCW Only, J-frame: CCW Axial, CW Radial
3. K/L Frame Controls are not rotation dependent
4. K2 Frame electric controls are limited only for Left orientation and up to 260 Bar
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 21
Electric On-Off Controls
PLUS+1 Compliance
All Series 45 Electric controls have met and passed the Danfoss PLUS+1 compliance standard testing, and
as such, this Series 45 control is PLUS+1 compliant. PLUS+1 compliance blocks are available on the
Danfoss website, within the PLUS+1 Guide section.
Electric On-Off Control Principle
The Electric On/Off Control consists of an On/Off solenoid integrated into a Remote Pressure
Compensated control. This control allows the pump to be operated at either the Load Sense pressure
setting when “On”, or the Pressure Compensation pressure setting when “Off”.
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, use a minimum 15bar LS setting to enhance system
stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20bar LS setting is
recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric On-Off Control Response/Recovery
S45 Electric On/Off Controls are available with two servo control orifice options, as well as without an
orifice. The servo control orifice is used to enhance system stability, as well as dampen the pump
reactiveness. A smaller orifice diameter will add dampening to the pump reactiveness, while a larger
orifice will allow quicker pump reaction.
Module “G” Options for Electric On/Off Controls
Frame “E” - 0.8mm Orifice “F” - 1.0mm Orifice “N” - No Orifice
All Frames
• • •
Specific Electric On/Off Control Response/Recovery times are shown for the available servo control orifice
options in the control section within each specific frame section. These times represent the response
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
22 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
from 75% of rated continuous pressure to 100% of rated continuous pressure, and recovery from 100% of
rated continuous pressure to 75% of rated continuous pressure for N.C. configuration per SAE J745 (vice-
versa for N.O). As the system pressure approaches the PC setting, the PC function will begin to assist in
clipping pressure overshoots during the pump’s response, and will decrease the response times of the
pump to equal those of the PC response.
Electric On-Off Control Performance vs. Ambient Temperature Characteristic
The Electric On/Off Controls continuous duty operating temperature range is shown below; this guideline
should be followed as well as the maximum current limitations. Note that rated voltage refers to either a
12V or 24V coil. Under high temperature conditions the PWM duty cycle to operate the solenoid
increases.
Continuous Duty Operating Temperature
50
60
70
80
90
100
-40
100
Percent of Rated Voltage (%)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
P108 415E
-30
-20
-10
0
60
80
10
20
30
40
50
70
90
110
120
Operating Range
Electric On-Off Control Characteristic – Normally Closed
The normally closed configuration On/Off control directs the pump to its Pressure Compensation
pressure setting when no current is applied. When the required electric current is sent to the normally
closed configuration control the pump pressure decreases to the Low-Pressure Standby setting. This
control does not have Load Sense functionality, but rather acts as a Pressure Compensation control when
not energized, or is directed to its low-pressure standby when energized. This control is especially useful
for machine startups, as the pump can be directed to its Low-Pressure Standby setting during startup to
reduce the load on engine starters.
Solenoid Data – Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Maximum Current 1500 mA 665 mA
Inrush Current 1700 mA 800 mA
Coil Resistance @ 20°C [70°F] 7.1 Ω 28.5 Ω
PWM Range 200-300 Hz
PWM Frequency (preferred) 250 Hz
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) IP67 IP67
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) with mating connector IP69K IP69K
Operating Temperature Consistent with Pump Limits:
-40°C (-40°F) to 104°C (220°F)
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 23
The available Normally Closed Electric On/Off Controls for the Series 45 are shown below. The allowable
Pressure Compensator (PC) and Load Sense (LS) pressure settings are provided for each frame in their
respective sections.
Electric On/Off Controls Options – Normally Closed Frame
Code Description L K
K2
J F E
AR Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
Left
• • • •
CR Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
Left
• • • •
AG Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
Right
• • •
AY Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
Right
• • •
BR Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
DR Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
BE Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
BG Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
EB Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
• •
EE Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
• •
Notes:
1. Left = E-Frame: CW Only, F-Frame: CW Only, J-frame: CW Axial, CCW Radial
2. Right = E-Frame: CCW Only, F-Frame: CCW Only, J-frame: CCW Axial, CW Radial
3. K/L Frame Controls are not rotation dependent
4. K2 Frame electric controls are limited only for Left orientation and up to 260 Bar
Electric On/Off Control Characteristic – Normally Open
The Normally Open configuration On/Off control directs the pump to its Low-Pressure Standby setting
when no current is applied. When the required electric current (end current) is sent to the Normally Open
configuration control, the pump pressure increases to the Pressure Compensation pressure setting. This
control does not have Load Sense functionality, but rather acts as a Pressure Compensation control when
energized, or is directed to its Low-Pressure Standby when de-energized. This control is especially useful
for machine startups, as the pump can be directed to its Low Pressure Standby setting during startup to
reduce the load on engine starters.
Solenoid Data – Normally Open
Voltage 12V 24V
Maximum Current 1500 mA 665 mA
Inrush Current 1700 mA 800 mA
Coil Resistance @ 20°C [70°F] 7.1 Ω 28.5 Ω
PWM Range 200-300 Hz
PWM Frequency (preferred) 250 Hz
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) IP67 IP67
IP Rating (IEC 60529 | DIN 40050-9) with mating connector IP69K IP69K
Operating Temperature Consistent with Pump Limits:
-40°C (-40°F) to 104°C (220°F)
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
24 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
The available Normally Open Electric On/Off Controls for the Series 45 Frame E are shown below, with the
allowable Pressure Compensator (PC) pressure range provided for each control. All Electric On/Off
Controls are available with the 10-40bar Load Sense (LS) setting range.
Electric On/Off Controls Options – Normally Open Frame
Code Description L K
K2
J F E
AN Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
Left
• • • •
CN Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
Left
• • • •
AF Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
Right
• • •
AT Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
Right
• • •
BN Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
DN Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
BF Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
DF Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
EA Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
• •
EG Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
• •
Notes:
1. Left = E-Frame: CW Only, F-Frame: CW Only, J-frame: CW Axial, CCW Radial
2. Right = E-Frame: CCW Only, F-Frame: CCW Only, J-frame: CCW Axial, CW Radial
3. K/L Frame Controls are not rotation dependent
4. K2 Frame electric controls are limited only for Left orientation and up to 260 Bar
Electric dump valve PC/LS controls
The electric dump valve pressure-compensated/load sense control allows the pump to operate as a
PC/LS type control under normal operating conditions. The solenoid dump valve overrides the LS control,
allowing the pump to operate in a Low-Pressure Standby mode. This function provides reduced
horsepower and torque loss in certain situations. It may be particularly useful to reduce loads on a system
during engine start.
When closed, the solenoid valve allows the control to act as a PC/LS control. When open, the solenoid
valve allows flow from the incoming load sense pressure to dump to case. This reduces the pressure in
the LS spring cavity, shifting the LS spool, and allows the pump to de-stroke to the Low-Pressure Standby
condition. This control is for applications needing a PC/LS control with the ability to switch to Low-
Pressure Standby electronically. The solenoid valve is available in a normally closed and open
configuration.
For high cycling or power management applications, ensure to limit margin pressures to 60 bar or less for
optimal control component life.
Refer to LS System Over-Signaling on page 48 for more details.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 25
Electric Dump Control (frames E, F and J)
P108589
System pressure
Load Sense Pressure
Servo pressure
Drain
LS adjustment
PC adjustment
LS spool
PC spool
Solenoid
Load sensing connection
for dump and ETL controls
Electronic Torque Limiting Controls (ETL)
PLUS+1 Compliance
All controls for this product have met and passed the Danfoss PLUS+1
®
compliance standard testing, and
as such, this product control is PLUS+1
®
Compliant. PLUS+1
®
compliance blocks (software) are available
on the Danfoss website, |
ETL load sense
connection port
Electric Torque Limiting Control Principle
The Electronic Torque Limiting control consists of a normally closed proportional relief valve (PRV)
integrated into a Pressure Compensated/Load Sensing control. This control operates as a PC/LS control,
with the additional ability to limit load sense pressure using the integrated PRV by varying the current to
the solenoid. When combined with an angle sensor, this control allows for a PC/LS control with electronic
torque limiting.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
26 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
J-frame pump with integrated ETL control
P108779
S
M2
X
B
(ETL Signal
Port)
Pump torque consumption is a function of pump outlet pressure, pump displacement, and pump
mechanical efficiency. When pump mechanical efficiency is considered constant, the pump torque can
be limited when pump displacement is known and pump pressure is controlled. As pump displacement
increases, the pump outlet pressure can be limited using the PRV to result in a constant torque limit.
Pump outlet pressure is equal to the load sense pressure, which is limited with the PRV, plus the margin
pressure setting of the pump.
Electronic Torque Limiting Control Characteristic
The Electronic Torque Limiting control allows users to limit pump torque consumption electronically by
combining a pressure limiting PRV and angle sensor. This torque limit can be changed with varying
engine speeds (as shown in the Electronic Torque Limiting graph below), allowing the use of full engine
torque at all engine speeds and increasing machine productivity. A microcontroller is required to store
engine torque vs speed, receive the pump angle sensor signal, and then calculate and output the pump
outlet pressure limit. The basic torque limiting control logic for a single engine speed is shown below.
Danfoss offers a PLUS+1 subsystem application block for the Electronic Torque Limiting control option in
combination with keyed MC012-112 microcontroller hardware. The part number for the keyed
MC012-112 microcontroller is 11157484. Refer to graph Operating Pressure vs. Input Current (N.C. EPC) on
page 19 for pressure vs. current information.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 27
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
0 50 100 150 200
Pump Pressure (bar)
Pump Displacement (cc)
Electronic Torque Limiting
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
P108783
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
50
Basic ETL Control Logic
P108785
Current to Valve (mA)
Current to Valve (mA)
Maximum System Pressure - ETL Active (bar)
Pump Displacement (cc)
Maximum System Pressure (bar)
Fan Drive Control (FDC)
PLUS+1 Compliance
All Series 45 Electric controls have met and passed the Danfoss PLUS+1 compliance standard testing, and
as such, this Series 45 control is PLUS+1 compliant. PLUS+1 compliance blocks (software) are available on
the Danfoss website, within the PLUS+1 Guide section.
Fan Drive Control Principle
The Fan Drive Control is a unique electrically actuated pressure control solution that consists of a
normally closed proportional solenoid and one dual diameter spool sliding in the control housing.
System pressure acts on an area between the two spool diameters of the spool lands. This hydraulic force
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
28 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
is balanced with forces of springs and the solenoid when the spool is in the metering position. When no
current is sent to the solenoid it operates the pump at or below the PC setting which is adjusted
mechanically with the adjustor screw and lock nut. Increasing the control current proportionally reduces
the pump's outlet pressure until a minimum standby pressure is reached.
Control Block 12V and 24V
The minimum system pressure is given by swashplate moments of the pump and by servo system
leakages which produce a pressure drop across the control. In addition, fan motor type and fan inertia
impact minimum system pressure.
The Normally Closed Fan Drive Control coupled with a microprocessor allows the pump to operate at an
infinite range of operating pressures between a minimum system pressure and PC setting.
We recommend that a relief valve be installed in the pump outlet for additional system protection.
W
Warning
The Fan Drive Control is intended for fan drive systems only! Use in other systems could result in system
component damage or unintended machine movement. The Fan Drive Control is not intended to serve
at the primary system pressure relief. Loss of the input signal to this control will cause the pump to
produce maximum flow.
Fan Drive Control System Characteristics
•
Constant pressure and variable flow
•
High or low system pressure mode based on fan cooling demand
•
System flow adjusts to meet system requirements
Unintended Applications for Fan Drive Control Systems
•
Applications with frequent PC events (system pressure overshoots)
•
Adjustable Load Sensing systems
Fan Drive Control Cross Section
Fan Drive Control characteristic - Normally Closed
When an electric current is sent to the Normally Closed Fan Drive Control, pump outlet pressure
decreases proportionally to the increase in currentt. When the load in the system changes, the pump will
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 29
adjust its displacement to maintain the pressure demanded by the controlling current. This predictable
control is especially useful for fan-drive systems, due to the direct relationship between fan-speed and
pump pressure. Due to the nature of the Fan Drive Control, the relationship between current and pump
pressure is unique for each individual PC pressure setting combination. The relationship between pump
outlet pressure and control input current (for a 24V coil) is shown for various PC settings below. The
hydraulic schematic for the Normally Closed Fan Drive Control is shown below as well.
Pump Outlet Pressure vs. control input current 24V Normally closed FDC (at 100Hz PWM)
P109029
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
PC310bar PC260bar PC210bar PC140bar PC100bar
Solenoid Input Current (mA)
Pump Outlet Pressure (bar)
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
30 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Pump Outlet Pressure vs. control input current 12V Normally closed FDC (at 100Hz PWM)
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
PC310bar PC260bar PC210bar PC140bar
P109028
PC100bar
Solenoid Input Current (mA)
Pump Outlet Pressure (bar)
Attaining remarkably low system pressures is possible with the Fan Drive Control. The minimum system
pressure is greatly dependent on individual system parameters such as fan motor type and fan size. This
feature is highly desirable in low cooling demand conditions to keep fan speed as slow as possible.
Virtually eliminated control deadband increases controllability and reduces power loss. Control current
resolution is greatly improved.
S45 pump with integrated FDC control Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109315
B
Legend
B
S
L1, L2
M2
= Outlet
= Inlet
= Case drain
= System pressure
gauge port
Gain
Orifice
Choke
Orifice
Solenoid data – Normally closed
Solenoid Data – Normally Closed
12V 24V
Connector on solenoid Deutsch DT04-2P
Mating Connector (not included) Deutsch DT06-2S
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 31
Solenoid Data – Normally Closed (continued)
12V 24V
Identification by color of nut Black Blue
Nominal current 1650 mA 840 mA
Maximum Control Current 1800 mA 920 mA
Environmental rating IP67 without mating connector,
IP69K with mating connector
Maximum output driver current 2.0 Amps
PLUS+1 dither frequency Not recommended
Useable PWM Frequency Range 50-200 Hz
Recommended PWM Frequency 200 Hz
Nominal Resistance at 20°C 3.66 Ω 14.2 Ω
Inductivity (pin at stroke end) 33 mH 140 mH
Minimum voltage 9.5 Vdc 19.0 Vdc
Maximum power 17.9 Watts 18.1 Watts
The Fan Drive Control is designed as a current driven control. It requires a PWM- input signal.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
32 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Fan Drive Control configuration
The available Normally Closed Fan Drive Controls for Series 45 are shown below. The allowable Pressure
Compensator (PC) pressure settings are provided for each frame.
C module—Control
Fan Drive Control Options Frame
Code Description L K K2 J F E
SA Fan Drive Control (12Vdc), 100-210 Bar, Left • • •
SB Fan Drive Control (24Vdc), 100-210 Bar, Left • • •
SC Fan Drive Control (12Vdc), 220-310 Bar, Left • • •
SD Fan Drive Control (24Vdc), 220-310 Bar, Left • • •
SE Fan Drive Control (12Vdc), 100-210 Bar, Right • •
SF Fan Drive Control (24Vdc), 100-210 Bar, Right • •
SG Fan Drive Control (12Vdc), 220-310 Bar, Right • •
SH Fan Drive Control (24Vdc), 220-310 Bar, Right • •
G module options—Choke Orifice
Fan Drive Control options Choke Orifice size
G 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
F 1.0 mm (0.039 in
H module options—Gain Orifice
Fan Drive Control options Gain Orifice Size
E 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
NC Fan Drive Control 3D Views
Left Right
Angle Sensor
PLUS+1 Compliance
The Electric Angle Sensor has met and passed the Danfoss PLUS+1 compliance standard testing, and as
such, this Angle Sensor is PLUS+1 compliant. PLUS+1 compliance blocks are available on the Danfoss
website, within the PLUS+1 Guide section.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 33
Angle Sensor Principle
The Series 45 Angle Sensor option allows users to measure the angle of pump displacement. The angle
sensor is an electronic sensor mounted to the housing of the pump, which reads the pump stroke angle
based on the swashplate position. Interfacing with the angle sensor is achieved through a 4-pin Deutsch
DTM04-4P receptacle attached to a flexible connection cable (for a mating connector, use Deutsch
®
plug
DTM06-4S). The sensor is mounted to the pump within an aluminum housing to prevent magnetic
interference.
Swashplate
AMR Sensor
Magnet Carrier
Deutsch Plug
P108788
Angle Sensor Characteristics
The angle sensor package incorporates two sensor signals (primary & secondary), within a single sensor
housing. This allows for improved accuracy and troubleshooting. For the ‘Angle Sensor – Right’ order
code in the K module, the sensor is positioned according to the following conventions:
Code Description Frame
K Module - Housing L K J F E
A1R SAE-C Flange 4-bolt, SAE O-ring boss ports, Single seal, Angle Sensor •
A2R SAE-C Flange 4-bolt, SAE O-ring boss ports, Single seal, Angle Sensor • •
AFR SAE-C Flange 2-bolt @45°, SAE O-ring boss ports, Single Seal, Angle Sensor •
M Module – Special Hardware
ANS Angle Sensor Hardware • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
34 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
J & F-Frame (45-90cc) Angle Sensor Identification Convention:
When looking at the input shaft with the control on the ‘top’ side, the angle sensor will be viewed on the
right hand side. This convention is true for both Clockwise and Counter-clockwise rotation J & F-Frames.
42.5
[1.67]
29.5
[1.16]
93.6
[3.68]
87.3
[3.44]
30.5
[1.2]
43.5
[1.71]
36
[1.417]
36
[1.417]
37.1
[1.462]
37.1
[1.462]
86.8
[3.417]
94.1
[3.704]
J Frame Angle Sensor Position
F Frame Angle Sensor Position
P108816
This sensor location yields a unique voltage versus swashplate angle characteristic curve which is the
same for both Clockwise and Counter-clockwise rotation J & F-frames. Although each pair of curves will
be unique for individual pumps, a general example of what to expect is provided below for J & F units
with the ‘Right’ angle sensor position.
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Sensor Output (Volts)
Swashplate Angle (Degrees)
Sensor Output Voltage vs. Swashplate Angle
CW & CCW J & F-Frames (45-90cc)
Primary Output Voltage Secondary Output Voltage
P108817
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 35
E-Frame (100-147cc) Angle Sensor Identification Convention:
The location convention for the E-Frame angle sensor is different from that of the J & F-Frame due to a
difference in design of the endcap and servo systems. When looking at the input shaft, the angle sensor
will be positioned on the same side as the outlet port of the endcap. The outlet port of the endcap is
always the smaller of the inlet and outlet ports, indicated below. This is the ‘right side’ order code
location, even though it appears on the left hand side from a frontal view.
P108821
36
[1.42]
E Frame Angle Sensor Position
Outlet Port
36
[1.42]
59.4
[2.34]
126.9
[5.0]
120
[4.72]
Approximate
Wire Length
131.5
[5.18]
Clockwise rotation E-frames appear with the control on the top side in this view. Counter-clockwise
rotation E-Frames appear with the control on the bottom side in this view.
This sensor location yields a unique voltage versus swashplate angle characteristic curve which is
different for Clockwise and Counter-clockwise rotation E-frames. Although each pair of curves will be
unique for individual pumps, a general example of what to expect is provided below for both Clockwise
and Counter-clockwise rotation units with the Right angle sensor position.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
36 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Sensor Output (Volts)
Swashplate Angle (Degrees)
Sensor Output Voltage vs. Swashplate Angle
CW E-Frames (100-147cc)
Primary Output Voltage
Secondary Output Voltage
P108823
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
13
14 15 16 17 18
Sensor Output (Volts)
Swashplate Angle (Degrees)
Sensor Output Voltage vs. Swashplate Angle
CCW E-Frames (100-147cc)
Primary Output Voltage Secondary Output Voltage
P108822
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 37
Angle sensor electrical specifications
Electrical specifications
Description Minimum Typical Maximum Unit Note
Supply (V+) 4.75 5 5.25 Vdc Sensor is ratiometric in the voltage range
Supply protection — — 28 Vdc Sensor will switch off above 5.5 V
Supply current drawn — 22 25 mA Sensor supply at 5 V
Output short circuit current
(VDD to SIG 1/2 and GND to
SIG 1/2)
— — 7.5 mA Additional 7.5 mA for each sensor signal,
total sensor 7.5x2+22=37 mA typical for
FSO
Sensitivity in sensing range at
calibration temperature for
primary and secondary sensor
70.02 78 85.8 mV —
Resolution — 0.03 — degree 11 bit output channel
Hysteresis — — — — Design of sensor eliminates any
mechanical hysteresis
Environment temperature
range
-40 (-40) 80 (176) 104 (220) °C (°F) If temperature limits are exceeded, the
sensor will function at a reduced level of
performance
Operating temperature range 20 (68) 50 (122) 95 (203) °C (°F) Temperature of oil
Storage temperature -40 (-40) — 125 (257) °C (°F) —
Accuracy for primary and
secondary signals throughout
operating temperature range
when calibrated at 50 deg. C
—
Primary: ±0.65
Secondary: ±0.85
— degree Includes linearity, temperature drift, and
repeatability. Does not include the error
due to offsets and different ferrous
environment
Refresh rate of the sensor — — 100 μs Internal ADC refresh rate
Angle Sensor Calibration
A 2-point calibration of the sensor is recommended, with points measured at pump standby, and
maximum pump stroke. Maximum pump stroke can be achieved when the pump input shaft is not being
turned, as Series 45 pumps are biased to maximum displacement. In some cases the pump may need to
be turned momentarily to ensure the pump is in the maximum displacement position; this can be
achieved through a momentary switching of the engine starter on/off.
Angle Sensor Functionality
The Series 45 angle sensor option is intended for functionality such as electronic torque limiting, duty
cycle measurement, troubleshooting, etc. The angle sensor is PLUS+1 compliant with an available
hardware compliance block.
Angle Sensor Intended Functionality:
•
Electronic Torque Limiting
•
Duty Cycle Recording
•
Troubleshooting
Angle Sensor Unsupported Functionality:
•
Displacement/Flow Control
Charge Pump Circuits
This section includes two general circuits for providing charge pressure to Series 45 pumps.
Example Circuit #1
Example Circuit #1 shows a generic open circuit charging layout.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
38 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
In applications where the Series 45 pump does not have the required inlet pressure available, an external
charge pump may be used to increase the inlet pressure to an acceptable level. Scenarios in which this
may occur include a layout with the pump above the reservoir, high altitude conditions, etc.
For circuit type #1, follow these recommendations:
•
Size the charge pump so that its flow is 10 to 20% greater than the Series 45 flow rate at worst case
conditions
•
Include a relief valve or check valve, as shown, between the charge pump and S45 pump with an
initial pressure setting of up to 10 bar; if aeration at the inlet of the S45 pump is still present, increase
the relief/cracking pressure up to 20 bar (maximum).
Generic open circuit
P108 641E
Charge Pump
Flow = Qp*110% to 120%
Series 45 Pump
Flow = Qp
Relief Valve or
Check Valve
Set to 10 bar
To work
Function
Example Circuit #2
Example Circuit #2 shows a semi-closed circuit charging layout.
In applications where the Series 45 pump does not have the required inlet pressure available, an external
charge pump may be used to increase the inlet pressure to an acceptable level. Scenarios in which this
may occur include a layout with the pump above the reservoir, high altitude conditions, etc.
For circuit type #2, follow these recommendations:
•
Determine if the work function ever consumes more flow than it expels (for example: double acting
or single acting cylinders). If so, determine the maximum flow differential in/out of the work function.
•
Size the charge pump so that its flow is 10-20% of the Series 45 pump flow at worst case conditions,
and increase this size by any work function flow differential which may occur.
•
An inline oil cooler may be required for this type of circuit.
•
Include an oil filter after the oil cooler; this ensures that any sediment in the oil cooler that may be
dislodged due to vibration or any other reason is caught in the filter.
•
Include a relief valve or check valve between the charge pump and S45 pump with an initial pressure
setting of up to 10 bar; if aeration at the inlet of the S45 pump is still present, increase the relief/
cracking pressure up to 20 bar (maximum).
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 39
Semi-closed circuit
P108 642E
Charge Pump
Flow = Qp*10% to 20%
+ work function flow differential
Series 45 Pump
Flow = Qp
Relief Valve or
Check Valve
Set to 10 bar
If the work function ever
consumes more flow than it
expels under certain
conditions, this flow must be
added to the charge pump size
To Work Function
Work Function
Oil Filter
Oil Cooler
Operating parameters
Fluids
Ratings and performance data for Series 45 products are based on operating with premium hydraulic
fluids containing oxidation, rust, and foam inhibitors. These include premium turbine oils, API CD engine
oils per SAE J183, M2C33F or G automatic transmission fluids (ATF), Dexron II (ATF) meeting Allison C-3 or
Caterpillar T0‑2 requirements, and certain specialty agricultural tractor fluids. For more information on
hydraulic fluid selection, see Danfoss publication 520L0463 Hydraulic Fluids and Lubricants, Technical
Information, and 520L0465 Experience with Biodegradable Hydraulic Fluids, Technical Information.
Viscosity
Fluid viscosity limits
Condition mm
2
/s (cSt) SUS
ν min. continuous 9 58
intermittent 6.4 47
ν max. continuous 110 500
intermittent (cold start) 1000 4700
Maintain fluid viscosity within the recommended range for maximum efficiency and pump life.
Minimum Viscosity – This should only occur during brief occasions of maximum ambient temperature and
severe duty cycle operation.
Maximum Viscosity – This should only occur at cold start. Pump performance will be reduced. Limit
speeds until the system warms up.
Temperature
Oil temperature limits are defined at the pump's case drain. As a rule of thumb, under steady state
conditions the case drain temperature is approximately 20 - 25 degrees Centegrade higher than the
pump's inlet oil temperature.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
40 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Frame L, K, J, F, & E Temperature Limits
Minimum
(intermittent, cold start)
- 40° C [- 40° F]
Continuous 82° C [180° F]
Maximum Intermittent 104° C [220° F]
Frame L, K, J, F, & E Maximum Temperature limits are based on material properties. Don't exceed it.
Measure temperature at the case drain of the pump.
K2 Frame Temperature Limits
Minimum
(intermittent, cold start)
- 40° C [- 40° F]
Continuous 104° C [219° F]
Maximum Intermittent 115° C [239° F]
Frame K2 Maximum temperature limits are higher than other frame sizes & based on improved
swashplate bearing material capabilities. Continuous operation at the Maximum Intermittent
Temperature is possible with K2 if fluid viscosity requirements are maintained. Minimum temperature for
all frame sizes relates to the physical properties of the component materials. Cold oil will not affect the
durability of the pump components. However, it may affect the ability of the pump to provide flow and
transmit power.
Ensure fluid temperature and viscosity limits are concurrently satisfied.
Inlet pressure
Inlet pressure limits
Minimum
(continuous)
0.8 bar absolute [6.7 in. Hg vac.]
(at reduced maximum speed)
Minimum
(cold start)
0.5 bar absolute [15.1 in. Hg vac.]
Maintain inlet pressure within the limits shown in the table. Refer to Inlet pressure vs. speed charts for
each displacement.
Case pressure
Case pressure limits
Maximum
(continuous)
0.5 bar [7 psi] above inlet
Intermittent
(cold start)
2 bar [29 psi] above inlet
Maintain case pressure within the limits shown in the table. The housing must always be filled with
hydraulic fluid.
C
Caution
Operating outside of inlet and case pressure limits will damage the pump. To minimize this risk, use full
size inlet and case drain plumbing, and limit line lengths.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 41
Pressure ratings
The specification tables in each section give maximum pressure ratings for each displacement. Not all
displacements within a given frame operate under the same pressure limits. Definitions of the operating
pressure limits appear below.
Continuous working pressure is the average, regularly occurring operating pressure. Operating at or below
this pressure should yield satisfactory product life. For all applications, the load should move below this
pressure. This corresponds to the maximum allowable PC setting.
Maximum (peak) working pressure is the highest intermittent pressure allowed. Maximum machine load
should never exceed this pressure, and pressure overshoots should not exceed this pressure. *See Duty
cycle and pump life.
Speed ratings
The specification tables in each section give minimum, maximum, and rated speeds for each
displacement. Not all displacements within a given frame operate under the same speed limits.
Definitions of these speed limits appear below.
Rated speed is the fastest recommended operating speed at full displacement and 1 bar abs. [0 in Hg vac]
inlet pressure. Operating at or below this speed should yield satisfactory product life.
Maximum speed is the highest recommended operating speed at full power conditions. Operating at or
beyond maximum speed requires positive inlet pressure and/or a reduction of pump outlet flow. Refer to
Inlet pressure vs. speed charts for each displacement.
Minimum speed is the lowest operating speed allowed. Operating below this speed will not yield
satisfactory performance.
Duty cycle and pump life
Knowing the operating conditions of your application is the best way to ensure proper pump selection.
With accurate duty cycle information, your Danfoss representative can assist in calculating expected
pump life.
Speed, flow, and inlet pressure
Inlet pressure vs. speed charts in each section show the relationship between speed, flow, and inlet
pressure for each displacement. Use these charts to ensure your application operates within the
prescribed range.
The charts define the area of inlet pressures and speeds allowed for a given displacement. Operating at
lower displacements allows greater speed or lower inlet pressure.
Sample inlet pressure vs. speed chart
Example
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800 4000
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed mi n (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
P108 486E
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
42 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Operating limit at 80% displacement
Operating limit at 90% displacement
Operating limit at 100% displacement
Design parameters
Installation
Series 45 pumps may be installed in any position. To optimize inlet conditions, install the pump at an
elevation below the minimum reservoir fluid level. Design inlet plumbing to maintain inlet pressure
within prescribed limits (see Inlet pressure limits)
Fill the pump housing and inlet line with clean fluid during installation. Connect the case drain line to the
uppermost drain port (L1 or L2) to keep the housing full during operation.
To allow unrestricted flow to the reservoir, use a dedicated drain line. Connect it below the minimum
reservoir fluid level and as far away from the reservoir outlet as possible. Use plumbing adequate to
maintain case pressure within prescribed limits (see Case pressure limits, ).
Filtration
To prevent damage to the pump, including premature wear, fluid entering the pump inlet must be free of
contaminants. Series 45 pumps require system filtration capable of maintaining fluid cleanliness at ISO
4406-1999 class 22/18/13 or better.
Danfoss does not recommend suction line filtration. Suction line filtration can cause high inlet vacuum,
which limits pump operating speed. Instead we recommend a 125 µm (150 mesh) screen in the reservoir
covering the pump inlet. This protects the pump from coarse particle ingestion.
Return line filtration is the preferred method for open circuit systems. Consider these factors when
selecting a system filter:
•
Cleanliness specifications
•
Contaminant ingression rates
•
Flow capacity
•
Desired maintenance interval
Typically, a filter with a beta ratio of β10 = 10 is adequate. However, because each system is unique, only
a thorough testing and evaluation program can fully validate the filtration system. For more information,
see Danfoss publication 520L0467 Design Guidelines for Hydraulic Fluid Cleanliness.
Reservoir
The reservoir provides clean fluid, dissipates heat, and removes entrained air from the hydraulic fluid. It
allows for fluid volume changes associated with fluid expansion and cylinder differential volumes.
Minimum reservoir capacity depends on the volume needed to perform these functions. Typically, a
capacity of one to three times the pump flow (per minute) is satisfactory.
Locate the reservoir outlet (suction line) near the bottom, allowing clearance for settling foreign particles.
Place the reservoir inlet (return lines) below the lowest expected fluid level, as far away from the outlet as
possible.
Fluid velocity
Choose piping sizes and configurations sufficient to maintain optimum fluid velocity, and minimize
pressure drops. This reduces noise, pressure drops, and overheating. It maximizes system life and
performance.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 43
Recommended fluid velocities
System lines 6 to 9 m/sec [20 to 30 ft/sec]
Suction line 1 to 2 m/sec [4 to 6 ft/sec]
Case drain 3 to 5 m/sec [10 to 15 ft/sec]
Typical guidelines; obey all pressure ratings.
Velocity equations
SI units
Q = flow (l/min)
A = area (mm²)
Velocity = (16.67•Q)/A (m/sec)
US units
Q = flow (US gal/min)
A = area (in²)
Velocity = (0.321•Q)/A (ft/sec)
Shaft loads
Series 45 pumps have tapered roller bearings capable of accepting external radial and thrust (axial) loads.
The external radial shaft load limits are a function of the load position, orientation, and the operating
conditions of the pump.
The maximum allowable radial load (R
e
) is based on the maximum external moment (M
e
) and the
distance (L) from the mounting flange to the load. Compute radial loads using the formula below. Tables
in each section give maximum external moment (M
e
) and thrust (axial) load (T
in
, T
out
) limits for each
pump frame size and displacement.
Radial load formula
M
e
= R
e
•L
L = Distance from mounting flange to point of load
M
e
= Maximum external moment
R
e
= Maximum radial side load
Shaft load orientation
P101 080E
T
in
T
out
L
R
e
Mounting flange
0° R
e
180° R
e
90°
R
e
270° R
e
30°
330°
Axis of swashplate
rotation
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
44 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Bearing life
All shaft loads affect bearing life. In applications where external shaft loads can not be avoided, maximize
bearing life by orientating the load between the 30° and 330° positions, as shown. Tapered input shafts or
clamp-type couplings are recommended for applications with radial shaft loads.
Mounting flange loads
Adding auxiliary pumps and/or subjecting pumps to high shock loads may overload the pump mounting
flange. Tables in each section give allowable continuous and shock load moments for each frame size.
Applications with loads outside allowable limits require additional pump support.
•
Shock load moment (M
S
) is the result of an instantaneous jolt to the system.
•
Continuous load moments (M
c
) are generated by the typical vibratory movement of the application.
Estimating overhung load moments
Use the equations below to estimate the overhung load moments for multiple pump mounting. See
installation drawings in each section to find the distance from the mounting flange to the center of
gravity for each frame size. Refer to the technical specifications in each section to find pump weight.
Overhung load example
mounting flange
L1
L2
Center of Gravity (CG)
pump 1
Center of Gravity (CG)
pump 2
P101 081E
Shock load formula
M
s
= G
s
•K•(W
1
•L
1
+W
2
•L
2
+...W
n
•L
n
)
Continuous load formula
M
c
= G
c
•K•(W
1
•L
1
+W
2
•L
2
+...W
n
•L
n
)
SI units
M
s
= Shock load moment (N•m)
M
c
= Continuous (vibratory) load moment (N•m)
G
s
= Acceleration due to external shock (G’s)
G
c
= Acceleration due to continuous vibration (G’s)
K = Conversion factor = 0.00981
W
n
= Mass of nth pump (kg)
L
n
= Distance from mounting flange to nth pump CG (mm)
US units
M
s
= Shock load moment (lbf•in)
M
c
= Continuous (vibratory) load moment (lbf•in)
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 45
G
s
= Acceleration due to external shock (G’s)
G
c
= Acceleration due to continuous vibration (G’s)
K = Conversion factor = 1
W
n
= Weight of nth pump (lb)
L
n
= Distance from mounting flange to nth pump CG (in)
Auxiliary mounting pads
Auxiliary mounting pads are available for all radial ported Series 45 pumps. Since the auxiliary pad
operates under case pressure, use an O-ring to seal the auxiliary pump mounting flange to the pad. Oil
from the main pump case lubricates the drive coupling.
•
All mounting pads meet SAE J744 Specifications.
•
The combination of auxiliary shaft torque and main pump torque must not exceed the maximum
pump input shaft rating. Tables in each section give input shaft torque ratings for each frame size.
•
Applications subject to severe vibratory or shock loading may require additional support to prevent
mounting flange damage. Tables in each section give allowable continuous and shock load moments
for each frame size.
•
The drawing and table below give mating pump dimensions for each size mount. Refer to installation
drawings in each section for auxiliary mounting pad dimensions.
Mating pump specifications
+0 -0.05
[+0 -0.002]
mm
[in.]
D
max
.
E
max.
F min. spline
engagement
for full torque
rating
Mounting
flange (ref)
Undercut
spline
Sled-runner
spline
P Ø
R 0.8 [0.03] max.
B
max.
C
max.
Coupling
Recommended
cutter clearance
2.3 [0.090]
Dimensions
SAE A SAE B SAE C
P 82.55
[3.250]
101.60
[4.000]
127.00
[5.000]
B 6.35
[0.250]
9.65
[0.380]
12.70
[0.500]
C 12.70
[0.500]
15.20
[0.600]
23.37
[0.920]
D 58.20
[2.290]
53.10
[2.090]
55.60
[2.190]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
46 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Dimensions (continued)
SAE A SAE B SAE C
E 15.00
[0.590]
17.50
[0.690]
30.50
[1.200]
F 13.50
[0.530]
14.20
[0.560]
18.30
[0.720]
Input shaft torque ratings
Input shaft tables in each section give maximum torque ratings for available input shafts. Ensure that
your application respects these limits.
Maximum torque ratings are based on shaft strength. Do not exceed them.
Coupling arrangements that are not oil-flooded provide a reduced torque rating. Contact your Danfoss
representative for proper torque ratings if your application involves non oil-flooded couplings.
Danfoss recommends mating splines adhere to ANSI B92.1-Class 6e. Danfoss external splines are class 5
fillet root side fit. Tolerance classes 5 and 6e have the same minimum effective space width and
maximum effective tooth thickness limits to ensure interchangeability between mating parts. Tables in
each section give full spline dimensions and data.
Understanding and minimizing system noise
Charts in each section give sound levels for each frame size and displacement. Sound level data are
collected at various operating speeds and pressures in a semi-anechoic chamber. Many factors contribute
to the overall noise level of any application. Below is some information to help understand the nature of
noise in fluid power systems, and some suggestions to help minimize it.
Noise is transmitted in fluid power systems in two ways: as fluid borne noise, and structure borne noise.
Fluid-borne noise (pressure ripple or pulsation) is created as pumping elements discharge oil into the
pump outlet. It is affected by the compressibility of the oil, and the pump’s ability to transition pumping
elements from high to low pressure. Pulsations travel through the hydraulic lines at the speed of sound
(about 1400 m/s [4600 ft/sec] in oil) until there is a change (such as an elbow) in the line. Thus, amplitude
varies with overall line length and position.
Structure-borne noise is transmitted wherever the pump casing connects to the rest of the system. The
way system components respond to excitation depends on their size, form, material, and mounting.
System lines and pump mounting can amplify pump noise. Follow these suggestions to help minimize
noise in your application:
•
Use flexible hoses.
•
Limit system line length.
•
If possible, optimize system line position to minimize noise.
•
If you must use steel plumbing, clamp the lines.
•
If you add additional support, use rubber mounts.
•
Test for resonants in the operating range, if possible avoid them.
Understanding and minimizing system instability
Knowing the operating conditions and system setup of your application is the best way to ensure a stable
system. All fan-drive circuits should use a choke orifice to ensure system stability. With accurate system
information, your Danfoss representative can assist you in the selection of a servo control orifice.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 47
LS System Over-Signaling
To optimize the life and performance of Series 45 products using Load Sensing controls, it is important to
ensure the margin pressure signal at the pump’s control is conditioned in a way which does not damage
the control’s internal components.
C
Caution
Excessive component wear may occur when margin pressures > 60 bar are imposed on the LS spool.
Reduce margin pressures to 60 bar or less.
Margin pressure defines the physical movement of the LS spool and subsequent modulation of pump
flow to the system and is defined by:
P
Margin
= P
System
- P
Load Sense
Margin Pressure
LS System Over-Signaling results when the actual margin pressure magnitude exceeds the minimum
pressure required to shift the LS spool. It is important to limit excessive margin pressures in transient
system conditions to ensure satisfactory control component life.
For more information on LS System Over-signaling please contact your Danfoss Representative.
Sizing equations
Use these equations to help select the right pump size, displacement and power requirements for your
application:
Variables
SI units [US units]
V
g
= Displacement per revolution cm
3
/rev [in
3
/rev]
p
O
= Outlet pressure bar [psi]
p
i
= Inlet pressure bar [psi]
∆p = p
O
- p
i
(system pressure) bar [psi]
n = Speed min
3
(rpm)
η
v
= Volumetric efficiency
η
m
= Mechanical efficiency
η
t
= Overall efficiency (η
v
• η
m
)
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
General Information
48 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Design
Series 45 Frame K2 pumps have a single servo piston design with a cradle-type swashplate set in
polymer-coated journal bearings. A bias spring and internal forces increase swashplate angle. The servo
piston decreases swashplate angle. Nine reciprocating pistons displace fluid from the pump inlet to the
pump outlet as the cylinder block rotates on the pump input shaft. The block spring holds the piston
slippers to the swashplate via the slipper retainer. The cylinder block rides on a bi-metal valve plate
optimized for high volumetric efficiency and low noise. Tapered roller bearings support the input shaft
and a viton lip-seal protects against shaft leaks.
An adjustable one spool (PC only, not shown) or two spool (LS and remote PC) control senses system
pressure and load pressure (LS controls). The control ports system pressure to the servo piston, adjusting
swashplate angle to control pump output flow.
Frame K2 cross section
P109073
Tapered roller
bearin g
Input shaf t
Shaft seal
Slipper
Slipper retainer
Piston
Cylinder block
Block spring
Valve plate
Servo piston
Endcap
(axial ported)
Swashplate
Bias spring
LS spool
PC spool
LS adjustment
PC adjustment
LS control
Tapered roller
bearing
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 49
Technical Specifications
K2 Frame
Unit 25C 30C 38C 45C
Maximum Displacement cm³ [in³] 25 [1.53] 30 [1.83] 38 [2.32] 45 [2.75]
Working Input
Speed
Minimum min -1 (rpm) 500 500 500 500
Continuous 3450 3200 2900 2900
Maximum
3750 3450 3050 3050
Working Pressure Continuous bar [psi] 260 [3771] 260 [3771] 260 [3771] 260 [3771]
Maximum 350 [5075] 350 [5075] 350 [5075] 350 [5075]
Flow at rated speed (theoretical) l/min
[US gal/min]
86.3
[22.8]
96.0
[25.4]
110.2
[29.1]
130.5
[34.5]
Input torque at maximum
displacement (theoretical)
at 49° C [120°F]
N•m/bar
[lbf•in/1000 psi]
0.398
[243]
0.477
[291]
0.605
[369]
0.716
[438]
Mass moment of inertia of internal
rotating components
kg•m²
[slug•ft²]
0.00184
[0.00135]
0.00184
[0.00135]
0.00184
[0.00135]
0.00203
[0.00150]
Weight -
Axial ports
kg [lb]
16 [35]
Weight -
Radial ports (no through drive)
17 [37]
External Shaft
Loads
External
moment (Me)
N•m [lbf•in] 61 [540] 61 [540] 76 [673] 76 [673]
Thrust in (Tin),
out (Tout)
N [lbf] 1000 [225] 1000 [225] 1200 [270] 1200 [270
Mounting flange
load moments
Vibratory
(continuous)
N•m [lbf•in] 1005 [8895]
Shock
(maximum)
3550 [31420]
Order Code
Code description
Code Description
R Product Frame, Variable Open Circuit Pump
S Rotation
P Displacement
C Control Type
D Pressure Compensator Setting
E Load Sense Setting
F Not Used
G Choke Orifice
H Gain Orifice
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
K Shaft Seal/Front Mounting Flange/Housing Ports
L Displacement Limiter
M Special Hardware
N Special Features
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
50 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
R Frame
K2 Frame
025C 030C 038C 045C
K2 K2 Frame, variable displacement open circuit pump
• • • •
S Rotation
K2 Frame
025C 030C 038C 045C
L Left Hand (counterclockwise)
• • • •
R Right Hand (clockwise)
• • • •
P Displacement
025C 025 cm³/rev [1.53 in³/rev]
•
030C 030 cm³/rev [1.83 in³/rev]
•
038C 038 cm³/rev [2.32 in³/rev]
•
045C 045 cm³/rev [2.75 in³/rev]
•
C Control type
K2 Frame
025C 030C 038C 045C
PC Pressure Compensator
• • • •
RP Remote Pressure Compensator
• • • •
LB Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. w/Bleed Orifice
• • • •
LJ
Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. (Metric)
• • • •
LS Load Sensing/Pressure Comp.
• • • •
FB
Electric Dump valve (On/Off ) w/Load sensing / Pressure comp. (NC,
12VDC), Left
• • • •
FE
Electric Dump valve (On/Off ) w/Load sensing / Pressure comp. (NC,
24VDC), Left
• • • •
FL Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. (Metric) (NC,24VDC) • • • •
FJ Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC), Left • • • •
FM Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC), Left • • • •
AH
Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NC,12VDC), Left
• • • •
AL
Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NC,24VDC), Left
• • • •
AX
Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NO,12VDC), Left
• • • •
CL
Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NO,24VDC), Left
• • • •
AR
Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NC,12VDC), Left
• • • •
CR
Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NC,24VDC), Left
• • • •
AN
Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NO,12VDC), Left
• • • •
CN
Electric On/Off Pressure Control w/Pressure comp. (NO,24VDC), Left
• • • •
SA
Fan drive control (12Vdc),100-210 Bar, Left
• • • •
SB
Fan drive control (24Vdc),100-210 Bar, Left
• • • •
SC Fan drive control (12Vdc),220-260 Bar, Left • • • •
SD
Fan drive control (24Vdc),220-260 Bar, Left
• • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 51
D PC setting (2 digit code, 10 bar increments)
Example 25 = 250 bar (3625 psi)
10–26 100 to 260 bar [1450 to 3771 psi]
• • • •
E Load sensing setting (2 digit code, 1 bar increments)
Example 20 = 20 bar (290 psi)
10–40 10 to 40 bar [145 to 580 psi]
• • • •
NN Not applicable (pressure compensated only controls)
• • • •
F Not used
NN Not applicable
• • • •
G Servo Control Orifice
N None (standard)
• • • •
E 0.8 mm diameter - Electrical proportional controls only
• • • •
F 1.0 mm dismeter - Electrical proportional controls only
• • • •
R 0.8 mm diameter - FDC only • • • •
S 1.0 mm dismeter - FDC only • • • •
H Gain Orifice
3 0.7 mm diameter
• • • •
E
Gain orifice FDC only, 1.2mm dia
• • • •
J Input Shaft
C2 13 tooth, 16/32 pitch
C3 15 tooth, 16/32 pitch
K1 0.875 inch straight keyed
K2 0.875 inch straight keyed (long)
T1 1.0 inch tapered
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style
Code
Auxiliary
Description
Endcap Style Inlet
Porting
Outlet
Porting
Endcap Description
MF
None Axial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
MP
None Axial Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
M10 threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
M10 threads)
NA None Axial
O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M42 threads)
Outlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M33 threads)
MG
None Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
NS None Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M48 threads)
Outlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M33 threads)
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
52 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style (continued)
MR
None Radial Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
0.375 inch threads)
RG
Running
Cover
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
RR
Running
Cover
Radial Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port
M12 threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
M10 threads)
AB SAE-A 9
teeth, M10
threads
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M48 threads)
Outlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M33 threads)
AG
SAE-A, 9
teeth, M10
threads
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
AK
Integrated
SAE-A, 9
teeth, M10
threads
Radial
Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port
M12 threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
M10 threads)
FB Integrated
SAE-A, 9
teeth, M10
threads
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M48 threads)
Outlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M33 threads)
FG Integrated
SAE-A, 9
teeth, M10
threads
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
EK
SAE-A, 9
teeth, M10
threads
Radial Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
0.375 inch threads)
TK SAE-A, 11
teeth, M10
threads
Radial
Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
0.375 inch threads)
GG SAE-A, 11
teeth, M10
threads
Radial
O-Ring Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
GT SAE-A, 11
teeth, M10
threads
Radial
O-Ring Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M48 threads)
Outlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M33 threads)
BG
SAE-B, 13
teeth, M12
threads
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
BB
SAE-B, 13
teeth, M12
threads
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M48 threads)
Outlet - ISO O-Ring boss port (M33 threads)
DR
SAE-B, 13
teeth, M12
threads
Radial Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port
M12 threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
M10 threads)
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 53
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style (continued)
VG
SAE-BB, 15
teeth, M12
threads
Radial O-Ring Boss O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
VK
SAE-BB, 15
teeth, M12
threads
Radial Split Flange Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port
0.375 inch threads)
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
Available Combinations
K2 Frame
025C 030C 038C 045C
C2MF
• • • •
C2MG
• • • •
C2MP • • • •
C2MR
• • • •
C2TK
• • • •
C3AB
• • • •
C3DR
• • • •
C3MF
• • • •
C3MG
• • • •
C3MP
• • • •
C3MR
• • • •
K1RG
• • • •
C2NA • • • •
C3NA • • • •
C2NS • • • •
C3NS • • • •
C2RR • • • •
C3RR • • • •
C2EK • • • •
C3EK • • • •
C3TK • • • •
C2DR • • • •
C2VK • • • •
C3VK • • • •
C2AK • • • •
C3AK • • • •
C3FG • • • •
C2AB • • • •
C2BB • • • •
C3BB • • • •
C2GT • • • •
C3GT • • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
54 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
K2 Frame
025C 030C 038C 045C
C2RG • • • •
C3RG • • • •
C2AG • • • •
C3AG • • • •
C2GG • • • •
C3GG • • • •
C2BG • • • •
C3BG • • • •
C2VG • • • •
C3VG • • • •
C3FB • • • •
C2FB • • • •
C2FG • • • •
K1AG • • • •
K1MF • • • •
K2MF • • • •
K2MG • • • •
K2MR • • • •
K2RG • • • •
K Shaft seal
K2 Frame
025C 030C 038C 045C
A Single (Viton [FKM])
• • • •
K Mounting flange and housing port style
6 SAE-B Flange 2-bolt/SAE O-ring boss ports [7/8-14]
• • • •
K Not used
N Not applicable
• • • •
L Displacement limiter
PLB None (plugged)
• • • •
AAA Adjustable, factory set at max angle • • • •
M Special hardware
NNN None
• • • •
N Special features
NNN None
• • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 55
Performance K2-25C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
P109103
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
Power (Kw)
Input Speed (rpm)
Input power vs. speed
140bar
210bar
260bar
Fl ow (l/min)
Speed min( rpm)
-1
Fl
ow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
Flow vs. speed
4000
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600
Efficiency [%]
Speed [RPM]
Efficiency, 210 BAR, Atm. BAR Inlet, Full flow, 49°C (120F)
Overall
Volumetric
Mechanical
Efficiency
RPM
500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000
Sound Level (dBA)
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
K2 25cc Sound Level vs. RPM
Legend
50 Bar
260 Bar
K2 Noise Level – 38cc kit @ 25cc Displacement
2600
3000
3400
3800
4200
4400
100% 90% 80%
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Shaft Speed min( rpm)
-1
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
3200
3600
4000
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
56 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance K2-30C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
P109104
Input power vs. speed
140bar
210bar
260bar
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
Power (Kw)
Input Speed (rpm)
Fl ow (l/min)
Speed min (rpm)
-1
Fl
ow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
Flow vs. speed
RPM
500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000
Sound Level (dBA)
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
K2 30cc Sound Level vs. RPM
Legend
50 Bar
260 Bar
K2 Noise Level – 38cc kit @ 30cc Displacement
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600
Efficiency [%]
Speed [RPM]
Overall
Volumetric
Mechanical
Efficiency
Efficiency, 210 bar, Atm. bar Inlet, Full flow, 49°C (120 F)
2600
3000
3400
3800
100% 90% 80%
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Shaft Speed min( rpm)
-1
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
3200
3600
4000
2800
120
28
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 57
Performance K2-38C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
140bar 210bar 260bar
0
20
30
40
50
60
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Power (Kw)
Input Speed (rpm)
Fl ow (l/min)
Speed min (rpm)
-1
Fl
ow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
Flow vs. speed
RPM
500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000
Sound Level (dBA)
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
K2 38cc Sound Level vs. RPM
Legend
50 Bar
260 Bar
K2 Noise Level – 38cc kit @ 38cc Displacement
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Efficiency [%]
Speed [RPM]
Overall
Volumetric
Mechanical
Efficiency, 210 BAR, Atm. BAR Inlet, Full flow, 49°C (120F)
Efficiency
P109105
2600
3000
3400
100% 90% 80%
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
3200
3600
2800
2400
120
28
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
58 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance K2-45C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
P109106
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
Flow (l/min)
Speed min( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
Flow vs speed
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Power (Kw)
Input Speed (rpm)
140bar
210bar
260bar
Input power vs. speed
RPM
500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000
Sound Level (dBA)
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
Legend
260 Bar
50 Bar
K2 45cc Sound Level vs. RPM
K2 Noise Level – 45cc kit @ 45cc Displacement
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Efficiency [%]
Speed [RPM]
Overall
Volumetric
Mechanical
Efficiency, 210 BAR, Atm. BAR Inlet, Full flow, 49°C (120F)
Efficiency
2600
3000
3400
100% 90% 80%
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Shaft Speed min( rpm)
-1
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
3200
3600
2800
2400
3000
3500
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 59
Hydraulic Controls
Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
25C 40 172
30C 44 152
38C 49 138
45C 49 138
PC Setting range
Model Bar Psi
25C 100-260
1450-3771
30C
38C
45C
Schematic
B
M1*
L2
S
L1
P104220
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
60 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
25C 40 172
35C 44 152
38C 49 138
45C 49 138
PC Setting Range
Model RP
25C 100-260 bar [1450-3770 psi]
30C 100-260 bar [1450-3770 psi]
38C 100-260 bar [1450-3770 psi]
45C 100-260 bar [1450-3770 bar]
LS Setting range
Model bar psi
All 10-40 145-580
Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
P104221
X
X
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
X = Remote PC port
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 61
Load Sensing Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
25C 40 172
30C 44 152
38C 49 138
45C 49 138
PC control setting range
Code Bar psi
25C
100-260 1450-3771
30C
38C
45C
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10-40 145–580
Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
X
X
P104223
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
X = LS signal port
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
62 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice /Pressure Compensated
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
25C 40 172
30C 44 152
38C 49 138
45C 49 138
PC control setting range
Code Bar psi
25C 100-260 1450-3771
30C
38C
45C
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10-40 145–580
Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
X
X
P104222
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
X = LS signal port
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 63
Electric Controls
Connectors
Description Quantity Ordering Number
Mating Connector 1 Deutsch® DT06-2S
Wedge Lock 1 Deutsch® W25
Socket Contact (16 and 18 AWG) 2 Deutsch® 0462-201-16141
Danfoss mating connector kit 1 K29657
1 2
P003 480
Continuous Duty Operating Range
Continuous duty operating range
50
60
70
80
90
100
-40
100
Percent of Rated Voltage (%)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
-30
-20
-10
0
60
80
10
20
30
40
50
70
90
110
120
Operating Range
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (310/260 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 200/400 100/200
End Current [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 1200 600
Solenoid Data - Normally Open
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 0 0
End Current [mA] (260/310 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 1000/1100 500/550
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
64 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 0 0
End Current [mA] (260/310 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 1000/1100 500/550
* Without servo control orifice
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
P108761
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
X = Load Sense Port
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
PC setting range
Frame AR (12V) CR (24V)
25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
30C
38C
45C
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 65
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
25C 40 172
30C 44 152
38C 49 138
45C 49 138
* Without servo control orifice
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than 15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
P108669
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
X = Load Sense Port
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
PC setting range
Frame AN (12V) CN (24V)
25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
30C
38C
45C
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
66 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
25C 85 518 79 358
30C 85 518 79
358
38C 85 518 79 358
45C
78
490 75 340
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
P108668
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AH (12V) AL (24V)
25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
30C
38C
45C
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 67
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 677E
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
25C 84 521 78 368
30C 84 521 78
368
38C 84 521 78 368
45C
81
498 74 343
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
B
X
M4
M2
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M1* = Gauge Port is available as an option. Standard products provided without a gauge port.
X = Load Sense Port
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
68 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
PC setting range
Frame AX (12V) CL (24V)
25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
30C
38C
45C
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J, K2 Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P109193
Normally Closed Fan Drive Control
PC setting range
Frame SA (12V) SC (12V) SB (24V) SD (24V)
25C
100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-260 bar [3190-3771]
psi
100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-260 bar [3190-3771]
psi
30C
38C
45C
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 69
Fan Drive Control Schematic
M1*
L2
S
L1
P109019
B
Legend
B
S
L1, L2
M1*
= Outlet
= Inlet
= Case drain
= Gauge Port is available
as an option. Standard
products provided
without a gauge port.
Gain
Orifice
Choke
Orifice
Input Shafts
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
C2 13 tooth spline
16/32 pitch
(ANSI B92.1 1970 - Class 6e)
288 [2546]
8 ± 0.475
[0.31 ±0.02]
33
[1.3]
15.2 ±0.5
[0.6 ±0.02]
Ø21.72 ± 0.09
[0.855 ±0.004]
Ø18.82
[0.74] MAX
13 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
20.638 [0.813] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH ANSI B92.1-1970
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P101993E
C3 15 tooth spline
16/32 pitch
(ANSI B92.1 1970 - Class 6e)
404 [3575]
8± 0.475
[0.31 ±0.02]
38
[1.5]
23.35 ± 0.5
[0.92 ±0.02]
Ø25.27 ± 0.12
[0.995 ±0.005]
Ø21.92
MAX [0.863]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
15 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
23.813 [0.938] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
P101994E
COMPATIBLE WITH ANSI B92.1-1970
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
70 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
K1 Ø 22.23 mm [0.875 in]
33 mm [1.3 in]
305 [2700]
8± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
33 [1.3]
Ø22.2 ±0.025
[0.874 ±0.001]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
6.35 [0.25]
x 12.7 [0.50] LONG
SQUARE KEY
P101 997E
[0.98
+0
-0.01
]
24.89
+0
-0.25
K2 Ø 22.23 mm [0.875 in]
63 mm [2.48 in] long
305 [2700]
8 ± 0.3
[0.315 ±0.035]
63
[2.48]
6.35 [0.25]
x 38.1 [1.5] LONG
SQUARE KEY
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P101 998E
Ø22.2 ±0.025
[0.874 ±0.001]
[0.98
+0
-0.01
]
24.89
+0
-0.25
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explanation of maximum torque.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 71
Installation Drawings
Axial Ported Endcap
P109081
33
33
S
B
S
B
33
33
30.2
58.7
52.4
26.2
Code Description Port
S System port (inlet), CW rotation shown O-ring boss per ISO 6149-1, M48x2-6H or M42x2-6H
Ø 31.8 - Split flange per ISO 6162-1, M10x1.5-6H 18
full thread depth
B System port (outlet), CW rotation shown O-ring boss per ISO 6149-1, M33x2-6H or M27x2-6H
Ø 25.4 - Split flange per ISO 6162-1, M10x1.5-6H 18
full thread depth
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
72 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
P109082
97.6
138.5 (2x)
80
33
33
R1 Max.
101.57 ± 0.025
Ø
171.6
System ports
spotface depth
175.6
9.4
67.3
Per
ISO 11926-1
SAE J1926/1
7/8-14
or
ISO 6149-1
M22x1.5-6H
37
Case drain
port L1
193
47.3
66 (2x)
64 (2x)
Spotface
depth
77.4
32
128.4
45°
System port B
(outlet)
Per ISO 11926-1
SAE J1926/1
1 5/16-12
System port S
(inlet)
Per ISO 11926-1
SAE J1926/1
1 7/8-12
K2 Pump with axial endcap
and LS control
67.3
Ø 14.3 (2x)
(77.4)
109.98
132.73
73
146
Aproximate
Center of
Gravity
(32)
(6.7)
(Ø 12.5)
Lifting lug
Per
ISO 11926-1
SAE J1926/1
7/8-14
or
ISO 6149-1
M22x1.5-6H
Case drain
port L2
80
(97.4)
25.8
32
Flange 101-2
per ISO 3019-1
(SAE J744-B)
Mounting flange
LS signal port X
Port ISO 11926-1
7/16-20
(alternate port
opposite side)
Aproximate
Center of
Gravity
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports
70
System port S
Ø 38.1 (inlet)
Split flange boss
Per ISO 6162-1
M12x1.75-6H
x 22.5 Min. Thd.
Radial endcap - CCW rotation
69.9
166
35.6
70
System port S
System port B
System port B
Ø 25 (outlet)
Split flange boss
Per ISO 6162-1
M10x1.5-6H
x 18 Min. Thd.
166
26.2
52.4
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 73
Radial Ported Endcap O-ring Boss Ports
P109088
Radial endcap - CW rotation
166
System port B
(outlet)
Per ISO 6149-1
M33x2-6H
Str. Thd.
166
System port S
(inlet)
Per ISO 6149-1
M48x2-6H
Str. Thd.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
74 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
P109094
9.4
73 (2x)
146
138.5 (2x)
80
166
System Port S
(Inlet)
1 7/8 -12 UN-2B Thd.
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
Per ISO 11926-1
(32)
(4.4)
Ø14.3
69.5
132.7
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
(2x)
128.4
Ø12.5
Lifting
lug
44.5
5.1
166
80
(20.7)
32
(112.8)
(100)
Lifting
lug
Mounting flange
Flange 101-2
per ISO 3019-1
(SAE J744-B)
Case drain
port L2
Per
ISO 11926-1
7/8-14
ISO 6149-1
M22x1.5-6H
Case drain
port L1
Per
ISO 11926-1
7/8-14
ISO 6149-1
M22x1.5-6H
101.57 ± 0.025
Ø
37
67.3
System port B
(Outlet)
per ISO 11926-1
1 5/16-12
Case drain
port L1
spotface
depth
Case drain
port L2
spotface
depth
66
66
58.3
193
Displacement limiter
option L0PLB
System Port S
spotface depth
System Port B
spotface depth
69.5
70 (2x)
97.6
110.3
(77.4)
CW rotation
with O-ring boss ports
Pump with radial
endcap - non through drive
Front Mounting Flange - SAE-B two bolt
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 75
Auxiliary Mounting Pads
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad
P109075
59.65
Mounting
flange
228.53
8.8 Min.
Per SAE
J744
O-ring seal required
Ref. 82.27 [3.239] I.D. X
2.62 [0.103] cross section
Ø 88.62
Ø 82.6
+0.08
0
8.0 ± 0.7
1.95
M10x1.5-6H Thd.
X 17.8 Min.
Thd. depth
2x
53.2
106.4
Coupling - SAE A: Spline data
Number of teeth
Pitch fraction
Pressure angle
Pitch Ø
Type of fit
Per
: 11
: 16/32
: 30°
: 17.463 [0.6875]
: Fillet root side
: ANSI B92.1 Class 6
Number of teeth
Pitch fraction
Pressure angle
Pitch Ø
Type of fit
Per
: 9
: 16/32
: 30°
: 14.288 [0.5625]
: Fillet root side
: ANSI B92.1 Class 6
Coupling - SAE A: Spline data
R0.51 Max.
Min. shaft
clearance
Specifications
Coupling 9-tooth 11-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 12.6 mm [0.50 in] 13.5 mm [0.53 in]
Maximum torque 107 N•m [950 lbf•in] 147 N•m [1300 lbf•in]
SAE-B auxiliary mounting pad
P109076
55.27
Mounting
flange
224.15
8.8 Min.
Per SAE
J744
O-ring seal required
Ref. 101.32 [3.989] I.D. X
1.78 [0.070] cross section
Ø 105.64
Ø 101.65
+0.08
0
11 ± 0.13
1.3
M12x1.75-6H Thd.
X 15.28 Min.
Thd. depth
2x
73
146
Coupling - SAE B: Spline data
Number of teeth
Pitch fraction
Pressure angle
Pitch Ø
Type of fit
Per
: 13
: 16/32
: 30°
: 20.638 [0.8125]
: Fillet root side
: ANSI B92.1 Class 6
Number of teeth
Pitch fraction
Pressure angle
Pitch Ø
Type of fit
Per
: 15
: 16/32
: 30°
: 23.813 [0.9375]
: Fillet root side
: ANSI B92.1 Class 6
Coupling - SAE B-B: Spline data
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
76 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Specifications
Coupling 13-tooth 15-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 13.2 mm [0.52 in] 16.1 mm [0.63 in]
Maximum torque 171 N•m [1512 lbf•in] 171 N•m [1512 lbf•in]
SAE-A Fixed flange
P109125
69.5
spotface depth
53.2 ± 0.18 (2x)
(25°)
204.2
67.3
166 (2x)
69.5
spotface depth
70 ± 0.8
70 ± 0.8
system port B
system port S
63
Auxiliary Mounting Pad - Running Cover
P109077
212.7
Mounting
flange
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 77
Electric solenoid, left side
P109096
53.83 ± 2.5
DEUTSCH type
(2) pin connector
Single spool control, Left side
Mounting flange
DEUTSCH connector
42.2 ± 2.5
101.39 ± 2.5
139.28 ± 2.5
164.29 ± 2.5
(B)
Mounting flange
162.6 ± 2.5
X-X
X
X
LS Signal port X
Per ISO 11926-1 7/16-20
193 ± 2.5
(B)
(13.58)
(125.95)
Fan drive control
P109097
157.9 ± 2.5
DEUTSCH type
(2) pin connector
Single spool control, Left side
DEUTSCH connector
80.86 ± 2.5
196.8 ± 2.5
124.59 ± 2.5
(B)
Mounting
flange
(113.95)
(40.49)
Displacement Limiter
K2 Frame open circuit pumps are available with an optional adjustable displacement limiter. This
adjustable stop limits the pump’s maximum displacement.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
78 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Cross-Section
P109150
Setting range
K2-25C 0 to 25 cm³ [0 to 1.53 in³]
K2-30C 0 to 30 cm³ [0 to 1.83 in³]
K2-38C 0 to 38 cm³ [0 to 2.32 in³]
K2-45C 0 to 45 cm³ [0 to 2.75 in³]
Displacement per turn
K2-25C 3.86 cm³/rev [0.24 in³/rev]
K2-30D 3.86 cm³/rev [0.24 in³/rev]
K2-38C 3.86 cm³/rev [0.24 in³/rev]
K2-45D 4.64 cm³/rev [0.28 in³/rev]
Installation Dimensions
P109080
24°
Adjusting screw 8mm hex
Displacement Limiter Option L0AAA
(174)
31.57 ± 1.2
Mounting flange
Seal nut 19mm hex
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame K2
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 79
Design
Series 45 Frame L and K pumps have a single servo piston design with a cradle-type swashplate set in
polymer-coated journal bearings. A bias spring and internal forces increase swashplate angle. The servo
piston decreases swashplate angle. Nine reciprocating pistons displace fluid from the pump inlet to the
pump outlet as the cylinder block rotates on the pump input shaft. The block spring holds the piston
slippers to the swashplate via the slipper retainer. The cylinder block rides on a bi-metal valve plate
optimized for high volumetric efficiency and low noise. Tapered roller bearings support the input shaft
and a viton lip-seal protects against shaft leaks.
An adjustable one spool (PC only, not shown) or two spool (LS and remote PC) control senses system
pressure and load pressure (LS controls). The control ports system pressure to the servo piston, adjusting
swashplate angle to control pump output flow.
Frame K/L cross section
Servo piston
Tapered roller
bearin g
Shaft seal
LS adjustment screw
LS spool
PC adjustment screw
PC spool
Swashplate
Input shaf t
Cylinder block
Piston
Slipper
Valve plate
Bias spring
Block spring
Slipper retainer
LS control
(attached to endcap)
Endcap
(axial ported)
P101 659E
Tapered roller bearing
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
80 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Technical Specifications
L Frame K Frame
Unit L25C L30D K38C K45D
Maximum Displacement cm³ [in³] 25 [1.53] 30 [1.83] 38 [2.32] 45 [2.75]
Working Input
Speed
Minimum min -1 (rpm) 500 500 500 500
Continuous 3200 3200 2650 2650
Maximum 3600 3600 2800 2800
Working Pressure Continuous bar [psi] 260 [3770] 210 [3045] 260 [3770] 210 [3045]
Maximum 350 [5075] 300 [4350] 350 [5075] 300 [4350]
Flow at rated speed (theoretical) l/min
[US gal/min]
80
[21]
96
[25.4]
100.7
[26.6]
119.3
[31.5]
Input torque at maximum
displacement (theoretical)
at 49° C [120°F]
N•m/bar
[lbf•in/1000 psi]
0.398
[243]
0.477
[291]
0.605
[369]
0.716
[438]
Mass moment of inertia of internal
rotating components
kg•m²
[slug•ft²]
0.00169
[0.00125]
0.00161
[0.00119]
0.00184
[0.00135]
0.00203
[0.00150]
Weight -
Axial ports
kg [lb] 19.0 [41.9]
Weight -
Radial ports
24.0 [52.9]
External Shaft
Loads
External
moment (Me)
N•m [lbf•in] 61 [540] 61 [540] 76 [673] 76 [673]
Thrust in (Tin),
out (Tout)
N [lbf] 1000 [225] 1000 [225] 1200 [270] 1200 [270
Mounting flange
load moments
Vibratory
(continuous)
N•m [lbf•in] 1005 [8895]
Shock
(maximum)
3550 [31420]
Order code
Code description
Code Description
R Product Frame, Variable Open Circuit Pump
S Rotation
P Displacement
C Control Type
D Pressure Compensator Setting
E Load Sense Setting
F Not Used
G Choke Orifice
H Gain Orifice
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
K Shaft Seal/Front Mounting Flange/Housing Ports
L Displacement Limiter
M Special Hardware
N Special Features
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 81
R Frame
L Frame K Frame
025C 030D 038C 045D
KR K Frame, variable displacement open circuit pump
• •
LR L Frame, variable displacement open circuit pump
• •
S Rotation
L Frame K Frame
025C 030D 038C 045D
L Left Hand (counterclockwise)
• • • •
R Right Hand (clockwise)
• • • •
P Displacement
025C 025 cm³/rev [1.53 in³/rev]
•
030D 030 cm³/rev [1.83 in³/rev]
•
038C 038 cm³/rev [2.32 in³/rev]
•
045D 045 cm³/rev [2.75 in³/rev]
•
C Control type
L Frame K Frame
025C 030D 038C 045D
PC Pressure Compensator
• • • •
RP Remote Pressure Compensator
• • • •
LB Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. w/Bleed Orifice
• • • •
LS Load Sensing/Pressure Compensator
• • • •
EA Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC)
• • • •
EG Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC)
• • • •
EB Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC)
• • • •
EE Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC)
• • • •
EK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
• • • •
EL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
• • • •
EM Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
• • • •
EN Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
• • • •
D PC setting (2 digit code, 10 bar increments)
Example 25 = 250 bar (3625 psi)
10–21 100 to 210 bar [1450 to 3045 psi]
• • • •
22-26 220 to 260 bar [3190 to 3771 psi]
• •
E Load sensing setting (2 digit code, 1 bar increments)
Example 20 = 20 bar (290 psi)
12–36 12 to 36 bar [174 to 522 psi]
• • • •
NN Not applicable (pressure compensated only controls)
• • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
82 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
F Not used
NN Not applicable
• • • •
G Servo Control Orifice
N None (standard)
• • • •
E 0.8 mm diameter - Electrical proportional controls only
• • • •
F 1.0 mm dismeter - Electrical proportional controls only
• • • •
J 0.8 mm diameter - All other controls • • • •
K 1.0 mm dismeter - All other controls • • • •
H Gain Orifice
3 1.0 mm diameter
• • • •
J Input Shaft
C2 13 tooth, 16/32 pitch
C3 15 tooth, 16/32 pitch
K1 0.875 inch straight keyed
K2 0.875 inch straight keyed (long)
T1 1.0 inch Taper
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style
Auxiliary
Description
Endcap
Style
Inlet
Porting
Outlet
Porting
Endcap Description Cod
e
None Axial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
Control - Left Side
NF
None Axial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.4375 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
Control - Left Side
NM
None Axial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port M10
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
Control - Left Side
NP
None Radial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
Control - Right Side
NG
None Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
Control - Right Side
NK
None Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
Control - Right Side
NR
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 83
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style (continued)
Running
Cover
Radial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
Control - Right Side
RG
Running
Cover
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
Control - Right Side
RK
SAE-A, 11
teeth
Radial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
Control - Right Side
TG
SAE-A, 9
teeth
Radial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
Control - Right Side
AG
SAE-A, 9
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
Control - Right Side
AK
SAE-B, 13
teeth
Radial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
Control - Right Side
BG
SAE-B, 13
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
Control - Right Side
BK
SAE-B, 13
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
Control - Right Side
BR
SAE-BB, 15
teeth
Radial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
Control - Right Side
VG
SAE-BB, 15
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
Control - Right Side
VK
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
Available Combinations
L Frame K Frame
025C 030D 038C 045D
C2AG
*
• • • •
C2BG
*
• • • •
C2BK
*
• • • •
C2NF
*
• • • •
C2NG
**
• • • •
C2NK
**
• • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
84 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
L Frame K Frame
025C 030D 038C 045D
C2NM
**
• •
C2NP
**
• •
C2NR
*
• •
C2RG
*
• • • •
C2TG
*
• • • •
C3AG
*
• • • •
C3AK
**
• •
C3BG
*
• • • •
C3NF
*
• • • •
C3NG
**
• • • •
C3NK
**
• •
C3RG
*
• • • •
*
PLB or AAA Displacement limiter options only
**
KNB Displacement limiter options only
L Frame K Frame
025C 030D 038C 045D
C3TG
*
• • • •
C3VG
*
• •
K1AG
*
• •
K1NF
*
• • • •
K1NG
**
• • • •
K1RG
*
• •
K2AG
*
• • • •
K2BG
*
• • • •
K2NF
*
• • • •
K2NG
**
• • • •
K2NM
**
• •
K2RG
*
• • • •
T1BG
*
• •
T1NF
*
• • • •
T1NG
**
• • • •
T1RG
*
• • • •
K Shaft seal
L Frame K Frame
025C 030D 038C 045D
A Single (Viton)
• • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 85
K Mounting flange and housing port style
6 SAE-B Flange 2-
bolt/SAE O-ring
boss ports
• • • •
K Not used
N Not applicable
• • • •
L Displacement limiter
AAA Adjustable, factory set at max angle
• • • •
KNB None
• • • •
PLB None (plugged)
• • • •
M Special hardware
NNN None
• • • •
N Special features
NNN None
• • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
86 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance L25C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
0
10
20
30
40
50
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
260
bar
[3770
psi]
210 bar [3045 psi]
140
bar
[2030
psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
0
500 1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 260 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
100
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
0
500
1000 1500 2000
2500 3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs -Inlet Temperature: 60C
260 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800 4000
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 87
Performance L30D
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
Flow (l/min)
Speed min( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
10
20
30
40
50
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Power (kW)
Speed min( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
210
bar
[3045
psi]
140
bar [2
030
psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 210 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs -Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800 4000
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
The Efficiency chart shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds
and lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Noise
dB(A) 210 bar [3045 psi]
1800 min-1 (rpm) Rated Speed
L30D 66 70
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
88 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance K38C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0
25
50
75
100
125
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
260 bar [3770 psi
]
140
bar [2
030
psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000 1500
2000
2500
3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 260 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
0 500 1000
1500 2000
2500
3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs -Inlet Temperature: 60C
260 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2200 2400 2600 2800 3000
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 89
Performance K45D
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
Flow (l/min)
Speed min (rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
210
bar
[3045
psi]
1
4
0
b
ar [2
0
3
0
p
si]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 210 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs -Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
0
500 1000 1500
2000 2500 3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs
-
Inlet Temperature: 60C
210 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2200 2400 2600 2800 3000
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
90 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Hydraulic Controls
Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times
(ms) Response Recovery
L25C 30 90
L30D 30 100
K38C 30 105
K45D 30 110
PC Setting Range
Model bar psi
L25C 100–260 1450–3770
L30D 100–210 1450–3045
K38C 100–260 1450–3770
K45D 100–210 1450–3045
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P101 980
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times
(ms) Response Recovery
L25C 30 90
L30D 30 100
K38C 30 105
K45D 30 110
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 91
PC Setting Range
Model bar psi
L25C 100–260 1450–3770
L30D 100–210 1450–3045
K38C 100–260 1450–3770
K45D 100–210 1450–3045
Schematic
X
B
M2
L2
S
L1
P101 981
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Remote PC port
Load Sensing/Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times
(ms) Response Recovery
L25C 30 70
L30D 30 70
K38C 30 80
K45D 30 80
PC Setting Range
Model bar psi
L25C 100–260 1450–3770
L30D 100–210 1450–3045
K38C 100–260 1450–3770
K45D 100–210 1450–3045
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
92 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 12-40 174-580
Schematic
X
B
M2
L2
S
L1
P101 982
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = LS signal port
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice /Pressure Compensated
Response/Recovery Times
(ms) Response Recovery
L25C 30 70
L30D 30 70
K38C 30 80
K45D 30 80
PC Setting Range
Model bar psi
L25C 100–260 1450–3770
L30D 100–210 1450–3045
K38C 100–260 1450–3770
K45D 100–210 1450–3045
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 12-40 174-580
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 93
LB Schematic
S
L2
M2
L1
B
X
P101 983
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = LS signal port
Electric Controls
Connector
Description Quantity Ordering Number
Mating Connector 1 Deutsch® DT06-2S
Wedge Lock 1 Deutsch® W25
Socket Contact (16 and 18 AWG) 2 Deutsch® 0462-201-16141
Danfoss mating connector kit 1 K29657
1 2
P003480
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
94 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Continuous Duty Operating Range
Continuous duty operating range
50
60
70
80
90
100
-40
100
Percent of Rated Voltage (%)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
-30
-20
-10
0
60
80
10
20
30
40
50
70
90
110
120
Operating Range
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (260/210 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 400/600 200/300
End Current [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 1200 600
Solenoid Data - Normally Open
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 0 0
End Current [mA] (260/210 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 1000/1100 500/550
Hysteresis
Frame Hysteresis
L25C, K38C Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
L30D, K45D Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
L25C 50 140
L30D 50 130
K38C 50 140
K45D 50 130
* Without servo control orifice: response/recovery from solenoid energized/de-energized.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 95
PC setting range
Frame EB (12V) EE (24V)
L25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
K38C
L30D 100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
K45D
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 12 - 40 [174 - 580]
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
X
P106 044
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
L25C 50 140
L30D 50 130
K38C 50 140
K45D 50 130
* Without servo control orifice: response/recovery from solenoid energized/de-energized.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
96 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
PC setting range
Frame EA (12V) EG (24V)
L25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
K38C
L30D 100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
K45D
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 12 - 40 [174 - 580]
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
X
P106 049
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Normally Closed Electric Proportional Controls with PC and LS Compensation
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
L25C 80 610 70 380
L30D 60 610 55 380
K38C 80 550 70 380
K45D 60 550 55 380
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 97
PC setting range
Frame EM (12V) EN (24V)
L25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
K38C
L30D 100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
K45D
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 12 - 40 [174 - 580]
Schematic
P108660
M2
L2
S
L1
X
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
98 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames K, L Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 676E
Normally Open Electric Proportional Controls with PC and LS Compensation
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
L25C 80 610 70 380
L30D 60 610 55 380
K38C 80 550 70 380
K45D 60 550 55 380
PC setting range
Frame EK (12V) EL (24V)
L25C 100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
100-260 bar
[1450-3370] psi
K38C
L30D 100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
100-210 bar
[1450-3045] psi
K45D
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 12 - 40 [174 - 580]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 99
Schematic
P108 661E
M2
L2
S
L1
X
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames K, L Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 676E
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
100 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Input shafts
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
C2 13 tooth spline
16/32 pitch
(ANSI B92.1 1970 - Class 6e)
288 [2546]
8 ± 0.475
[0.31 ±0.02]
33
[1.3]
15.2 ±0.5
[0.6 ±0.02]
Ø21.72 ± 0.09
[0.855 ±0.004]
Ø18.82
[0.74] MAX
13 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
20.638 [0.813] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH ANSI B92.1-1970
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P101993E
C3 15 tooth spline
16/32 pitch
(ANSI B92.1 1970 - Class 6e)
404 [3575]
8± 0.475
[0.31 ±0.02]
38
[1.5]
23.35 ± 0.5
[0.92 ±0.02]
Ø25.27 ± 0.12
[0.995 ±0.005]
Ø21.92
MAX [0.863]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
15 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
23.813 [0.938] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
P101994E
COMPATIBLE WITH ANSI B92.1-1970
T1 Ø 25.4 mm [1 in]
1:8 taper (SAE J501)
362 [3200]
6.299
+0.025
-0.000
[0.248
+0.001
-0.000
]
WOODRUFF KEY
[0.875
+0.000
-0.010
]
Ø22.22
[0.87]
GAUGE
3/4-16UNF-2A THD
9.42 ± 0.3
[0.37 ±0.01]
25.4
[1]
8 ± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
69.89 REF
[2.75]
34.92± 0.63
[1.375 ±0.025]
26.97
[1.06]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
125 TAPER PER METER
SAE J501
GAUGE
P101 996E
22.225
+0.254
-0.000
COMPATIBLE WITH
25.4 [1] NOMINAL SHAFT DIAMETER
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 101
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
K1 Ø 22.23 mm [0.875 in]
33 mm [1.3 in]
305 [2700]
8± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
33 [1.3]
Ø22.2 ±0.025
[0.874 ±0.001]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
6.35 [0.25]
x 12.7 [0.50] LONG
SQUARE KEY
P101 997E
[0.98
+0
-0.01
]
24.89
+0
-0.25
K2 Ø 22.23 mm [0.875 in]
63 mm [2.48 in] long
305 [2700]
8 ± 0.3
[0.315 ±0.035]
63
[2.48]
6.35 [0.25]
x 38.1 [1.5] LONG
SQUARE KEY
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P101 998E
Ø22.2 ±0.025
[0.874 ±0.001]
[0.98
+0
-0.01
]
24.89
+0
-0.25
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explanation of maximum torque.
Installation drawings
Axial Ported Endcap
P108 416E
[1.3]
33
[1.3]
33
SYSTEM
PORT B
(OUTLET)
SAE J1926/1
1 5/16-12
SYSTEM
PORT S
(INLET)
SAE J1926/1
1 7/8-12
SERVO PRESSURE
GAGE PORT
SAE J1926/1
3/4-16
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
58.72
[2.312]
52.37
[2.062]
Ø31.8
[1.25]
INLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘S’
276 BAR [4000] PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 61
with 7/16 - 14 UNC
X 17 [0.669] MIN THD
30.18
[1.188]
33
[1.30]
26.19
[1.031]
33
[1.30]
Ø25.4
[1]
OUTLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘B’
345 BAR [5000] PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 61
with 3/8 - 16 UNC
X 20 [0.787] MIN THD
Split Flange Ports
O-Ring Boss Ports
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
102 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
P106170E
[0.04]
R1 MAX
[1.46]
37
[3.999 0.001]±
101.57Ø 0.025±
[0.37]
9.4
[6.89]
175.1
[6.8]
172.6
[3.15]
80
[6.6]
167.7
[5.29]
134.3
[6.11]
155.2
[2.44]
62
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
SAE J1926/1
7/16-20
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SAE J1926/1
7/8-14
[8.79]
223.2
[4.16]
105.8
[2.77]
70.4
[7.16]
181.9
[2.67]
67.7
[2.67]
67.7
[0.59]
15
[7.18]
182.4
SYSTEM PRESSURE
GAGE PORT M2
SAE J1926/1
9/16-18
or
M14x1.5-6H
SYSTEM PORTS S & B
SPOTFACE DEPTH
M2
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SPOTFACE DEPTH
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SPOTFACE DEPTH
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
[3.9]
99
[0.26]
6.7
[2.87]
73
[5.75]
146
[4.8]
121.9
[5.2]
132
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
[1.26]
32
[3.15]
80
[1.02]
25.8
[3.83]
97.4
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SAE J1926/1
7/8-14
CCW
CW
[0.563]
14.3
Ø
2X
ISO 11926-1
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports
P106171
69.92
[2.753]
Ø38.1
[1.5]
INLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘S’
207 BAR [3000] PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 61
with 1/2 - 13 UNC
X 27 [1.063] MIN THD
Ø25.4
[1]
OUTLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘B’
345 BAR [5000] PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 61
with 3/8 - 16 UNC
X 20 [0.787] MIN THD
35.85
[1.411]
166
[6.54]
52.37
[2.062]
29.19
[1.031]
166
[6.54]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 103
Radial Ported Endcap O-ring Boss Ports
P108 418E
R1 MAX
[0.04]
62
[2.44]
166
[6.54]
37
[1.46]
80
[3.15]
Ø101.57 ± 0.025
[3.999 ± 0.001]
9.4
[0.37]
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET)
SAE J1926/1
1 5/16 -12
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SAE J1926/1
7/8 -14
B
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
80
[3.15]
166
[6.54]
32
[1.26]
134.3
[5.29]
20.7
[0.81]
155.2
[6.11]
112.8
[4.44]
146
[5.75]
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SAE J1926/1
7/8 -14
SYSTEM
PORT S
(INLET)
SAE J1926/1
1 7/8 -12
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View
P108 419E
Left Hand Rotation (CCW)
Right Hand Rotation (CW)
94.5
[3.72]
94.5
[3.72]
95
[3.74]
95
[3.74]
94.5
[3.72]
94.5
[3.72]
95
[3.74]
95
[3.74]
SYSTEM PORT S
SPOTFACE DEPTH
SYSTEM PORT B
SPOTFACE DEPTH
SYSTEM PORT S
SPOTFACE DEPTH
SYSTEM PORT B
SPOTFACE DEPTH
SYSTEM
PORT S
INLET
SYSTEM
PORT B
OUTLET
SYSTEM
PORT S
INLET
SYSTEM
PORT B
OUTLET
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
104 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
P108 420E
R1 MAX
[0.04]
62
[2.44]
166
[6.54]
37
[1.46]
80
[3.15]
Ø101.57 ± 0.025
[3.999 ± 0.001]
9.4
[0.37]
67.7
[2.67]
67.7
[2.67]
90.5
[3.56]
207.9
[8.19]
15
[0.59]
207
[8.15]
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET)
SAE J1926/1
1 5/16 -12
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SAE J1926/1
7/8 -14
SYSTEM PRESSURE
GAGE PORT M2
SAE J1926/1
9/16 -18
B
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SPOTFACE DEPTH
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SPOTFACE DEPTH
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
80
[3.15]
166
[6.54]
32
[1.26]
134.3
[5.29]
20.7
[0.81]
155.2
[6.11]
112.8
[4.44]
146
[5.75]
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SAE J1926/1
7/8 -14
SYSTEM
PORT S
(INLET)
SAE J1926/1
1 7/8 -12
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
99
[3.9]
4.4
[0.17]
Ø14.3
[0.563]
73
[2.87]
146
[5.75]
119.4
[4.5]
132
[5.2]
LS STANDBY
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
PC
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
CCW
CW
2X
Front Mounting Flange - SAE-B two bolt
P108 421E
[3.9]
99
[0.26]
6.7
[2.87]
73
[5.75]
146
[4.8]
121.9
[5.2]
132
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
CCW
CW
[0.563]
14.3
Ø
2X
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 105
Auxiliary Mounting Pads
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad
53.2 [2.09]
106.4
[4.19]
59.65
[2.35]
228.53
[8.997]
1.95
[0.08]
8.1 ± 0.7
[0.319 ±0.028]
Ø88.62
[3.49]
3/8-16UNC-2BTHD
17.8 [0.70] MIN
THD DEPTH
COUPLING-SAE A:
SPLINE:
11 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
17.463 [0.6875] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER SAE B92.1-1970,CLASS 6
MOUNTING
FLANGE
R 0.51 MAX
[0.020]
8.8
[0.35]
PER SAE J744
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 82.22 [3.237] I.D.X
2.62 [0.103] CROSS SECTION
MIN SHAFT
CLEARANCE
COUPLING-SAE A:
SPLINE:
9TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30 PRESSURE ANGLE
°
14.288 [0.5625] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970,CLASS 6
Ø82.6
+0.08
-0
[3.252
+0.003
-0
]
P101999E
P/N 5000373
Min.
Specifications
Coupling 9-tooth 11-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 12.6 mm [0.50 in] 13.5 mm [0.53 in]
Maximum torque 107 N•m [950 lbf•in] 147 N•m [1300 lbf•in]
SAE-B auxiliary mounting pad
73
[2.87]
146
[5.75]
55.27
[2.18]
8.8
[0.35]
224.15
[8.82]
1.3
[0.05]
11 ± 0.13
[0.43±0.01]
Ø105.64
[4.159]
1/2-13UNC-2BTHD
19.7 [0.76] MIN
THD DEPTH
MOUNTING
FLANGE
COUPLING-SAE B
SPLINE:
13 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
20.638 [0.8125] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
R2 MAX
[0.08]
COUPLING-SAE B-B
SPLINE:
15 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30 PRESSURE ANGLE
°
23.813 [0.9375] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
MIN SHAFT
CLEARANCE
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 101.32 [3.989] I.D.X
1.78 [0.070] CROSS SECTION
PER SAE J744
Ø101.65
+0.08
-0
[4.002
+0.003
-0
]
P104000E
P/N 726935
Min.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
106 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Specifications
Coupling 13-tooth 15-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 13.2 mm [0.52 in] 16.1 mm [0.63 in]
Maximum torque 171 N•m [1512 lbf•in] 171 N•m [1512 lbf•in]
Auxiliary Mounting Pad - Running Cover
P106 077E
212.7
[8.37]
Electric Solenoid, Left Side
P108 425E
167.8
[6.61]
144.5
[5.69]
Deutsch type
(2) pin connector
4.7
[0.18]
122.8
[4.83]
9.5
[0.37]
16.9
[0.67]
6.3
[0.25]
101.1
[3.98]
Electric Solenoid, Right Side
P108 426E
212.8
[8.38]
9.5
[0.37]
16.9
[0.67]
6.3
[0.25]
191.1
[7.52]
144.5
[5.69]
Deutsch type
(2) pin connector
4.7
[0.18]
167.8
[6.61]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 107
Displacement limiter
L and K Frame open circuit pumps are available with an optional adjustable displacement limiter. This
adjustable stop limits the pump’s maximum displacement.
Cross-Section
P104 084
Setting range
L25C 0 to 25 cm³ [0 to 1.53 in³]
L30D 0 to 30 cm³ [0 to 1.83 in³]
K38C 0 to 38 cm³ [0 to 2.32 in³]
K45D 0 to 45 cm³ [0 to 2.75 in³]
Displacement per turn
L25C 1.20 cm³/rev [0.07 in³/rev]
L30D 1.43 cm³/rev [0.09 in³/rev]
K38C 1.81 cm³/rev [0.11 in³/rev]
K45D 2.15 cm³/rev [0.13 in³/rev]
Installation Dimensions
P104 065E
83.3
[3.28]
222
[8.74]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frames L and K
108 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Design
Series 45 Frame J pumps have a single servo piston design with a cradle-type swashplate set in polymer-
coated journal bearings. A bias spring and internal forces increase swashplate angle. The servo piston
decreases swashplate angle. Nine reciprocating pistons displace fluid from the pump inlet to the pump
outlet as the cylinder block rotates on the pump input shaft. The block spring holds the piston slippers to
the swashplate via the slipper retainer. The cylinder block rides on a bi-metal valve plate optimized for
high volumetric efficiency and low noise. Tapered roller bearings support the input shaft and a viton lip-
seal protects against shaft leaks.
An adjustable one spool (PC only, not shown) or two spool (LS and PC) control senses system pressure
and load pressure (LS controls). The control ports system pressure to the servo piston to control pump
output flow.
Frame J cross section
LS adjustment
PC adjustmen t
LS spool
PC spool
LS control
(attached to endcap)
Servo piston
Swashplate
Tapere d
roller
bearing
Shaft seal
Tapered roller
bearin g
Input shaf t
Cylinder
block
Valve
plate
Cylinder
block
spring
Piston
Slipper
Slipper retainer
Bias spring
LS control
P104204
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 109
Technical Specifications
J Frame
Unit S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
Maximum Displacement cm³ [in³] 45 [2.75] 51 [3.11] 60 [3.66] 65 [3.97] 75 [4.58]
Working Input
Speed
Minimum min -1 (rpm) 500 500 500 500 500
Continuous 2800 2700 2600 2500 2400
Maximum 3360 3240 3120 3000 2880
Working
Pressure
Continuous bar [psi] 310 [4500] 310 [4500] 310 [4500] 260 [3770] 260 [3770]
Maximum 400 [5800] 400 [5800] 400 [5800] 350 [5075] 350 [5075]
Flow at rated speed
(theoretical)
l/min
[US gal/min]
126
[33.3]
138
[36.4]
156
[41.2]
162
[42.9]
180 [47.5]
Input torque at maximum
displacement (theoretical)
at 49° C [120°F]
N•m/bar
[lbf•in/1000 psi]
0.717
[437.4]
0.812
[495.7]
0.955
[583.2]
1.035
[631.8]
1.194 [729]
Mass moment of inertia of
internal rotating components
kg•m²
[slug•ft²]
0.00455
[0.00336]
0.00455
[0.00336]
0.00455
[0.00336]
0.00433
[0.00319]
0.00433
[0.00319]
Weight Axial ports kg [lb] 23.1 [51.0]
Radial ports 27.3 [60.2]
External Shaft
Loads
External
moment (Me)
N•m [lbf•in] 226 [2000] 226 [2000] 226 [2000] 226 [2000] 226 [2000]
Thrust in (Tin),
out (Tout)
N [lbf] 2200 [495] 2200 [495] 2200 [495] 2200 [495] 2200 [495]
Mounting
flange load
moments
Vibratory
(continuous)
N•m [lbf•in] SAE-C: 1500 [13300], SAE-B: 735 [6600]
Shock
(maximum)
SAE-C: 5600 [49600], SAE-B: 2600 [23100]
Order code
Code description
Code Description
R Product Frame, Variable Open Circuit Pump
S Rotation
P Displacement
C Control Type
D Pressure Compensator Setting
E Load Sense Setting
F Not Used
G Choke Orifice
H Gain Orifice
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
K Shaft Seal/Front Mounting Flange/Housing Ports
L Displacement Limiter
M Special Hardware
N Special Features
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
110 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
R Product
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
JR J Frame, variable displacement open circuit pump
• • • • •
S Rotation
L Left Hand (counterclockwise)
• • • • •
R Right Hand (clockwise)
• • • • •
P Displacement
S45B 045 cm³/rev [2.75 in³/rev]
•
S51B 051 cm³/rev [3.11 in³/rev]
•
S60B 060 cm³/rev [3.66 in³/rev]
•
S65C 065 cm³/rev [3.97 in³/rev]
•
S75C 075 cm³/rev [4.58 in³/rev]
•
C Control type
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
PC Pressure Compensator
• • • • •
BC* Pressure Compensator [>280 bar]
• • •
RP Remote Pressure Compensator
• • • • •
BP* Remote Pressure Compensator [>280 bar]
• • •
LS Load Sensing/Pressure Comp.
• • • • •
BS* Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. [>280 bar]
• • •
LB Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. with internal bleed orifice
• • • • •
BB* Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. with internal bleed orifice [>280 bar]
• • •
AN Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) Left
• • • • •
CN Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) Left
• • • • •
AR Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) Left
• • • • •
CR Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Left
• • • • •
AF Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) Right
• • • • •
AT Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) Right
• • • • •
AG Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) Right
• • • • •
AY Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Right
• • • • •
BN* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
DN* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
BR* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
DR* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• • •
BF* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
DF* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
BE* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
BG* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 111
C Control type (continued)
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
AX Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) Left
• • • • •
CL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) Left
• • • • •
AH Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Left
• • • • •
AL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Left
• • • • •
AW Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) Right
• • • • •
CK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) Right
• • • • •
AV Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Right
• • • • •
AK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Right
• • • • •
BX* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
DL* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
BH* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
BL* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Left
• • •
BW* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
DK* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
BM* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
BK* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC)
[>280 bar] Right
• • •
FA* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 12VDC)
Right
• • •
FB* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 12VDC)
Left
• • • • •
FE* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 24VDC),
Left
• • • • •
FM* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 24VDC),
Right
• • • • •
TA Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Left • • • • •
TB Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Left • • • • •
TC Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Left • • • • •
TD Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Left • • • • •
TE Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Right • • • • •
TF Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Right • • • • •
TG Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Right • • • • •
TH Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Right • • • • •
SA Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Left • • •
SB Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Left • • •
SC Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Left • • •
SD Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Left • • •
SE Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Right • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
112 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
C Control type (continued)
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
SF Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Right • • •
SG Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Right • • •
SH Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Right • • •
Left - E-Frame: CW Only, F-Frame: CW Only, J-frame: CW Axial, CCW Radial
Right - E-Frame: CCW Only, F-Frame: CCW Only, J-frame: CCW Axial, CW Radial
* Not available on 65cc and 75cc pumps
D PC setting (2 digit code, 10 bar increments)
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
Example 25 = 250 bar (3625 psi)
10–26 100 to 260 bar [1450 to 3771 psi]
• • • • •
27-28 270 to 280 bar [3916 to 4061 psi]
• • •
29-31 290-310 bar [4206 to 4496 psi]
• • •
E Load sensing setting (2 digit code, 1 bar increments)
Example 20 = 20 bar (290 psi)
10-40 10 to 40 bar [175 to 580 psi]
• • • • •
NN Not applicable (pressure compensated only controls)
• • • • •
F Not used
NN Not applicable
• • • • •
G Servo Control Orifice
N None (standard)
• • • • •
E 0.8 mm diameter
• • • • •
F 1.0 mm diameter
• • • • •
H Gain Orifice
3 1.0 mm diameter (standard orifice)
• • • • •
C 0.8 mm diameter LS signal line orifice for ETL use (with
standard orifice)
• • • • •
Additional LS signal line orifice size options are available for necessary system tuning requirements.
Contact your Danfoss representative for further information.
J Input Shaft
C2 13 tooth, 16/32 pitch
C3 15 tooth, 16/32 pitch
S1 14 tooth 12/24 pitch
S5 14 tooth, 12/24 pitch, with 5/16-18 UNC Thread
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 113
J Input Shaft (continued)
K4 1.25 inch straight keyed
T0 1.25 inch tapered
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style
Auxiliary
Description
Endcap
Style
Inlet
Porting
Outlet
Porting
Endcap Description Cod
e
None Axial O-Ring
Boss
O-Ring
Boss
Inlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.875 inch threads)
Outlet - SAE O-Ring boss port (1.3125 inch threads)
NH
None Axial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
N9
None Axial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads), w/ Disp. Limiter
NZ
None Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
NE
None Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
metric threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
metric threads)
NX
None Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads), w/ Disp. Limiter,
Large servo bore
NV
Running
Cover
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
RE
Running
Cover
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads), w/ Disp. Limiter
RF
Running
Cover
Radial
Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
metric threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
metric threads)
RX
SAE-A, 11
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
TE
SAE-A, 11
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
with integral SAE “A” Aux. pad (0.375 inch threads)
TY
SAE-A, 11
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
TF
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
114 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style (continued)
SAE-A, 11
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
with integral SAE “A” Aux. pad (0.375 inch threads)
TZ
SAE-A, 9
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
AE
SAE-A, 9
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
with displacement limiter
AF
SAE-A, 9
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
with integral SAE “A” Aux. pad (0.375 inch threads)
AY
SAE-A, 9
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
AX
SAE-A 9T
Metric M10
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
AZ
SAE-A 11T
Rotated 90
Degrees
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
with displacement limiter
GF
SAE-B, 13
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
BE
SAE-B, 13
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads), w/ Disp. Limiter
BF
SAE-B, 13
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
BX
SAE-B, 13T
Rotated 90
Degrees
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
JE
SAE-BB, 15
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
VE
SAE-BB, 15
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads), w/ Disp. Limiter
VF
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 115
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style (continued)
SAE-BB, 15
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
VX
SAE-BB, 15T
Metric M12
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
VM
SAE-BB, 15
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads), Large servo bore
DX
SAE-C, 14
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads)
CE
SAE-C, 14
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375
inch threads), w/ Disp. Limiter
CF
SAE-C, 14
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port M12
threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port M10
threads)
CX
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
Available Combinations
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
C2AE*
• • • • •
C2AY*
• • • • •
C2AF* • • • • •
C2AX* • • • • •
C2BE*
• • • • •
C2BF**
• • • • •
C2CE*
• • • • •
C2N9*
• • • • •
C2NE*
• • • • •
C2NH*
• • • • •
C2NV**
• • • • •
C2NZ*
• • • • •
C2RE*
• • • • •
C2RF**
• • • • •
C2TE*
• • • • •
C2TF**
• • • • •
C2TY*
• • • • •
C2VE*
• • • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
116 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
C3AE*
• • • • •
C3AF**
• • • • •
C3AY*
• • • • •
C3BE*
• • • • •
C3BF**
• • • • •
C3CE*
• • • • •
C3DX* • • • • •
C3GX* • • • • •
C3N9*
• • • • •
C3NE*
• • • • •
C3NH*
• • • • •
C3NV**
• • • • •
C3NX*
• • • • •
C3NZ*
• • • • •
C3RE*
• • • • •
C3RF**
• • • • •
C3TE*
• • • • •
C3TF* • • • • •
C3TZ*
• • • • •
C3VE*
• • • • •
C3VF* • • • • •
C3VM* • • • • •
K4AE*
• • • • •
K4AF**
• • • • •
K4AY* • • • • •
K4BE*
• • • • •
K4BF**
• • • • •
K4CE*
• • • • •
K4CF**
• • • • •
K4N9*
• • • • •
K4NE*
• • • • •
K4NH*
• • • • •
K4NV**
• • • • •
K4NZ*
• • • • •
K4RE*
• • • • •
S1AZ* • • • • •
S1JE* • • • • •
S5BE* • • • • •
S5RX* • • • • •
* NNN Displacement limiter options only
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 117
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
JK4RF**
• • • • •
JK4TE*
• • • • •
JK4VE*
• • • • •
JS1AE*
• • • • •
JS1AF**
• • • • •
JS1AY*
• • • • •
JS1BE*
• • • • •
JS1BF**
• • • • •
JS1CE*
• • • • •
JS1CF**
• • • • •
JS1DX*
• • • • •
JS1N9*
• • • • •
JS1NE*
• • • • •
JS1NH*
• • • • •
JS1NV**
• • • • •
JS1NX*
• • • • •
JS1NZ*
• • • • •
JS1RE*
• • • • •
JS1RF**
• • • • •
JS1TE*
• • • • •
JS1TF**
• • • • •
JS1VE*
• • • • •
JS1VF*
• • • • •
JT0AE*
• • • • •
JT0BE*
• • • • •
JT0BF*
• • • • •
JT0CE*
• • • • •
JT0N9*
• • • • •
JT0NE*
• • • • •
JT0NH*
• • • • •
JT0NV**
• • • • •
JT0NZ*
• • • • •
JT0RE*
• • • • •
JT0TE*
• • • • •
JT0VE*
• • • • •
JT0VF**
• • • • •
** FFF Displacement limiter options only
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
118 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
K Shaft seal
J Frame
S45B S51B S60B S65C S75C
A Single (Viton)
• • • • •
K Mounting flange and housing port style
2 SAE-C Flange 4-bolt/SAE O-ring boss port
• • • • •
8 SAE-B Flange 2-bolt/SAE O-ring boss ports
• • • • •
9 SAE-C Flange 2-bolt/SAE O-ring boss ports
• • • • •
F SAE-C Flange 2-bolt rotated 90° SAE O-ring boss ports • • • • •
K Angle Sensor Housing
N Not applicable
• • • • •
R Angle Sensor Housing, Right Hand Side • • • • •
L Displacement limiter
NNN None
• • • • •
FFF Adjustable, factory set at max angle
• • • • •
M Special hardware
JJJ None
• • • • •
ANS Angle Sensor Swashplate • • • • •
N Special features
NNN None
• • • • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 119
Performance J45B
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
140 bar [2030 psi]
260
bar [3770
psi]
310
bar [4
495
psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000
1500 2000 2500
3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 310 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500
1000 1500
2000
2500 3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
310 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
Noise
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
120 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance J51B
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
10
20
30
40
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
25
50
75
100
125
140
bar
[2030
psi]
260
bar
[3770
psi]
310 bar [4495 psi]
Power (kW)
Speed min (rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500 3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 310 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0 500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
310 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 121
Performance J60B
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
10
20
30
40
50
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
140
bar
[2030
psi]
260
bar [3
770
ps
i]
310 bar [4495 psi]
Power (kW)
Speed min (rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000 1500 2000
2500
3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 310 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500
1000
1500
2000 2500
3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
310 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
122 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance J65C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
bar
[2030
psi]
210
bar
[3045
psi]
260 bar [3770 psi]
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0 500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 260 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500
1000 1500
2000
2500 3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
260 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 123
Performance J75C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0
40
80
120
160
200
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
10
20
30
40
50
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
260 bar [3770 psi]
210
bar [3
045
psi]
140
bar [2030
psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0 500
1000
1500
2000 2500
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 260 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
85
90
0
500 1000 1500
2000
2500
3000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
80
260 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
124 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Hydraulic Controls
Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
J45B 33 140
J51B 33 150
J60B 39 170
J65C 45 140
J75C 45 150
PC Setting range
Model PC BC
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J51B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J60B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J65C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
J75C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
Schematic
B
M1
L2
S
L1
P104 220
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M1* = System pressure gauge port
* M1 port is available on axially ported endcaps only
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 125
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
J45B 33 140
J51B 33 150
J60B 39 170
J65C 45 140
J75C 45 150
PC Setting Range
Model RP BP
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J51B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J60B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J65C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
J75C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
LS Setting range
Model bar psi
All 10-40 145-580
Schematic
M1
L2
S
L1
P104 221
X
X
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
X = Remote PC port
M1* = System pressure gauge port
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
126 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
* M1 port is available on axially ported endcaps only
Load sensing/Pressure compensated Controls
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
J45B 33 140
J51B 33 150
J60B 39 170
J65B 45 140
J75B 45 150
PC control setting range
Code LS BS
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J51B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J60B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J65C, 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
J75C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10-40 145–580
Schematic
M1
L2
S
L1
X
X
P104 223
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
X = LS signal port
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 127
M1* = System pressure gauge port
* M1 port is available on axially ported endcaps only
Load sensing Control with Bleed Orifice/ Pressure Compensated
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
J45B 33 140
J51B 33 150
J60B 39 170
J65B 45 140
J75B 45 150
PC control setting range
Code LB BB
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J51B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J60B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
J65C, 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
J75C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 bar]
N/A
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10-40 145–580
Schematic
M1
L2
S
L1
X
X
P104 222
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
128 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
X = LS signal port
M1* = System pressure gauge port
* M1 port is available on axially ported endcaps only
Electric Controls
Connectors
Description Quantity Ordering Number
Mating Connector 1 Deutsch® DT06-2S
Wedge Lock 1 Deutsch® W25
Socket Contact (16 and 18 AWG) 2 Deutsch® 0462-201-16141
Danfoss mating connector kit 1 K29657
1 2
P003 480
Continuous Duty Operating Range
Continuous duty operating range
50
60
70
80
90
100
-40
100
Percent of Rated Voltage (%)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
-30
-20
-10
0
60
80
10
20
30
40
50
70
90
110
120
Operating Range
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (310/260 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 200/400 100/200
End Current [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 1200 600
Solenoid Data - Normally Open
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 0 0
End Current [mA] (260/310 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 1000/1100 500/550
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 129
Hysteresis
Frame Hysteresis
J45B, J51B, J60B Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
J65C, J75C Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
Fan Drive Control Solenoid Data - Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Maximum Control Current [mA] 1800 920
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times (without servo control orifice)
(msec) Response Recovery
J45B 33 140
J51B 33 150
J60B 39 170
J65C 45 140
J75C 45 150
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109311
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
130 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
PC setting range
Frame AG, AR (12V) BE, BR (12V) AY, CR (24V) BG, DR (24V)
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
J51B
J60B
J65C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
J75C
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
J45B 33 140
J51B 33 150
J60B 39 170
J65C 45 140
J75C 45 150
* Without servo control orifice
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than 15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109312
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 131
PC setting range
Frame AF, AN (12V) BF, BN (12V) AT, CN (24V) DF, DN (24V)
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
J51B
J60B
J65C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
J75C
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
J45B 33 425 33 325
J51B 33 455 33 325
J60B 39 515 39 395
J65C 45 425 45 325
J75C 45 455 45 350
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109313
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
132 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
PC setting range
Frame AH, AV (12V) BH, BM (12V) AK, AL (24V) BK, BL (24V)
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
J51B
J60B
J65C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
J75C
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 677E
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
J45B 33 425 33 325
J51B 33 455 33 325
J60B 39 515 39 395
J65C 45 425 45 325
J75C 45 455 45 350
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 133
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109314
B
X
M4
M2
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AW, AX (12V) BW, BX (12V) CK, CL (24V) DK, DL (24V)
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
J51B
J60B
J65C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
J75C
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 677E
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
134 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Normally Closed Electric Torque Limiting Control with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery Times*
(msec) Response Recovery
J45B 33 140
J51B 33 150
J60B 39 170
J65C 45 140
J75C 45 150
Pin location
2 3
4
1
P200 151
Pinout
Pin Description
1 Supply -
2 Ouput signal 2 - Secondary Signal
3 Output signal 1 - Primary Signal
4 Supply +
PC setting range
Frame TA, TE (12V) TC, TG (12V) TB, TF (24V) TD, TH (24V)
J45B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
J51B
J60B
J65C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
J75C
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 135
J-frame pump with integrated ETL control
P108779
S
M2
X
B
(ETL Signal
Port)
Normally Closed Fan Drive Control
PC setting range
Frame SA , SE (12V) SC, SG (12V) SB, SF (24V) SD, SH (24V)
J45B 100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-310 bar [3190-4495]
psi
100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-310 bar [3190-4495]
psi
J51B
J60B
J65C 100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-260 bar [3190-3771]
psii
100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-260 bar [3190-3771]
psii
J75C
Fan Drive Control Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109315
B
Legend
B
S
L1, L2
M2
= Outlet
= Inlet
= Case drain
= System pressure
gauge port
Gain
Orifice
Choke
Orifice
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
136 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Input shafts
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
C2 13 tooth spline
16/32 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class 6e)
For use with SAE-B
288 [2546]
Ø18.63 MAX
8± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
15.2 ± 0.5
[0.6 ±0.02]
Ø21.72 ±0 .09
[0.855 ±0.004]
13 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
20.638 [0.813] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH ANSI B92.1B-1996
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
[0.733]
33.3
±
0.38
[1.31
± 0.015]
P104224
C3 15 tooth spline
16/32 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class 6e)
For use with SAE-B
404 [3575]
Ø25.27±0 .13
[0.995 ±0.005]
Ø21.96 MAX
8± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
22.36 ±0 .5
[0.88 ±0.02]
15 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
23.813 [0.938] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH ANSI B92.1B-1996
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
[0.864]
P104225
38.0
±
0.43
[1.50
± 0.017]
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explanation of maximum torque.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 137
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
S1 14 tooth spline
12/24 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class 6e)
800 [7080]
8± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
Ø25.4 Max.
[1]
Ø31.14 ±0 .08
[1.226 ±0.003]
28 ±0 .5
[1.1 ±0.02]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BETOND
THIS POINT
14 TOOTH 12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
29.633 [1.167] PITCH
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH
ANSI B92.1B-1996 CLASS 6e
ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
P104226
47.58
±
0.43
[1.87
± 0.017]
S5 14 tooth spline
12/24 pitch
(BNSI A92.1B 1996 - Class 6e)
800 [7080]
8± 0.8
[0.316 ±0.031]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BETOND
THIS POINT
P108656
Ø25.53
Max.
[1.01]
Ø31.14
±0 .08
[1.226
±0.003]
28 ±0 .5
[1.1 ±0.02]
14 TOOTH 12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
29.634 [1.167] PITCH
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH
ANSI B92.1B-1996 CLASS 6e
ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
47.58
±
0.43
[1.87
± 0.017]
7
±
0.2
[0.28
± 0.008]
0.3125-18 UN-2B
19 Min.
[0.75]
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explanation of maximum torque.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
138 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
K4 Ø 31.75 mm [1.25 in]
straight key
655 [5797]
56
[2.2]
47.7±0.48
[1.88]±0.019
8± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
35.2 ± 0.13
[1.39 ±0.01]
Ø31.72 ±0 .025
[1.249 ±0.001]
7.94 [0.313]
X 28.56 [1.125] LONG
SQUARE KEY
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BETOND
THIS POINT
P104227E
27.9 max.
19 min.
3.8 max.
5/16-18 thd
Dia. 11.18
TO Ø 31.75 mm [1.25 in]
1:8 taper
734 [6495]
8± 0.8
[0.31 ±0.03]
22.4 ± 0.3
[0.88 ±0.01]
Ø30.1625
[1.19]
42.92
[1.69]
30.96±0.25
[1.219]±0.01
GAUGE
GAUGE
7.887
X Dia. 31.8
WOODRUFF KEY
1.00-20 UNF-2A THD
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P104 228E
125 TAPER PER METER
SAE J501
COMPATIBLE WITH
31.8 [1.25] NOMINAL SHAFT DIAMETER
+0.8
-1.1
+.03
-0.04
[0.3105]
+0.025
- 0
+0.001
- 0
[1.25]
+0
- 0.010
+0
-0.25
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explanation of maximum torque.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 139
Installation drawings
Axial Ported Endcap
44.5
[1.75]
36.2
[1.43]
SYSTEM PORT S
OUTLET
Ø50.8 [2]
(INLET PORT)
3000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
SAE J518
(CODE 61)
207 bar
PER ISO 6162
with 1/2-13 UNC
X 23 [0.906] MIN THREAD
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET PORT)
5000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
SAE J518
(CODE 61)
OUTLET
Ø25.4 [1]
345 bar
PER ISO 6162
with 3/8-16 UNC
X 18.61 [0.732] MIN THREAD
77.77
[3.062]
52.37
[2.062]
42.88
[1.688]
26.19
[1.031]
36.2
[1.43]
44.5
[1.8]
SYSTEM PORTS
SYSTEM PORT B
(INLET POR
T)
SAE J1926/
1
1 7/8 -12
(OUTLET PORT)
SAE J1926/1
1 5/16 -12
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
Split F lange Ports
O-Ring Boss Ports
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
140 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
Ø101.58 ± 0.025
[3.999 ±0.001]
R1 MAX
[0.04]
9.4
[0.37]
198.8
[7.83]
15
[0.59]
82.4
[3.24]
77.5
[3.05]
113.6
[4.5]
82.1
[3.2]
262.3
[10.33]
83.4
[3.28]
47
[1.85]
28.9
[1.14]
246.3
[9.7]
73.2
[2.88]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
SYSTEM PRESSURE
CASE DRAIN PORT L1
LS SIGNAL PORT X
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SPOTFACE
DEPTH
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SPOTFACE
DEPTH
BOTH
SIDES
GAUGE PORT M1
SAE J1926/1
9/16 -18
SAE J1976/1
7/8 -14
SAE J1926/1
7/16 -20
BOTH SIDES
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
ISO 11926-1
73
[2.87]
146
[5.75]
Ø14.4
[0.567]
77.2
[3.04]
0.9
[0.04]
11.2
[0.4]
96.7
[3.81]
53.3
[2.1]
92.7
[3.65]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
PC PRESSURE
LS STANDBY
ADJUSTMENT
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
2X
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 141
Right Fan Drive Control
P109023
Deutsch Connector
DT04-2P
179.7
149.9
101.8
78.4
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports
77.5
[3.05]
194.6
[7.66]
239.8
[9.44]
200.4
[7.89]
82.4
[3.24]
SYSTEM PORT S
PC PRESSURE
LS STANDBY
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SPOTFACE
DEPTH
LS SIGNAL PORT X
LS SIGNAL PORT X
ALTERNATE
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SPOTFACE
DEPTH
(INLET PORT)
207 BAR [3000 PSI}
SPLIT FLANGE
SAE J518
(CODE 61)
ADJUSTMENT
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
P108 438E
PER ISO 6162
with 1/2-13 UNC
X 27 [1.063] MIN THREAD DEPTH
Ø50.8 [2]
INLET
188.84
[7.43]
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET PORT)
345 BAR [5000 PSI] SPLIT FLANGE
PER ISO 6162
Ø25.4 [1]
SAE J518 (CODE 61)
with 3/8-16 UNC X 22 [0.866]
MINIMUM THREAD DEPTH
26.19
[1.031]
52.37
[2.062]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
142 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View
Radial ported endcap rear view
116. 5
[4.59]
44. 9
[1.77]
132
[5.2 ]
76. 2
[3 ]
84
[3.31]
99. 4
[3.9 ]
76.2
[3]
84
[3.31]
LS SIGNAL PORT X
SAE J1926/1
0.4375-20
BO TH
SIDES
SY STEM
PORT S
INLET
SY STEM
PORT B
OUTLET
BO TH
SIDES
SYSTEM
PORT S
INLET
SYSTEM
PORT B
OUTLET
Interference with internal components will occur
if fitting depth in port X is greater than 11.8 mm [0.465 in]
*
*
Left Hand Rotation (C CW)
Right Hand Rotation (CW )
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 143
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
77.5
[3.05]
194.6
[7.66]
9.4
[0.37]
242.4
[9.54]
Ø101.58 ± 0.025
[3.999 ±0.001]
R1 MAX
[0.04]
15
[0.59]
239.8
[9.44]
200.4
[7.89]
82.4
[3.24]
SYSTEM PORT S
47
[1.85]
82.1
[3.23]
PC PRESSURE
LS STANDBY
CASE DRAIN PORT L1
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SPOTFACE
DEPTH
LS SIGNAL PORT X
LS SIGNAL PORT X
ALTERNATE
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SPOTFACE
DEPTH
(INLET PORT)
207 BAR [3000 PSI}
SPLIT FLANGE
SAE J518
(CODE 61)
ADJUSTMENT
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
SAE J 1976/1
7/8-14
P106 173E
PER ISO 11976-1
PER ISO 6162
with 1/2-13 UNC
X 27 [1.063] MIN THREAD DEPTH
Ø50.8 [2]
INLET
128.8
[5.1]
188.84
[7.43]
96.7
[3.8]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET PORT)
345 BAR [5000 PSI] SPLIT FLANGE
PER ISO 6162
Ø25.4 [1]
SAE J518 (CODE 61)
with 3/8-16 UNC X 22 [0.866]
MINIMUM THREAD DEPTH
26.19
[1.031]
52.37
[2.062]
73
[2.87]
146
[5.75]
Ø14.4
[0.567]
77.2
[3.04]
3.2
[0.1]
10.4
[0.4]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
2X
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
144 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Right Angle Sensor Position Installation Dimensions
P108780
42.5
[1.67]
29.5
[1.16]
93.6
[3.68]
87.3
[3.44]
30.5
[1.2]
43.5
[1.71]
33.2
[1.31]
100.7
[3.96]
32.2
[1.27]
105
[4.13]
SAE-C 4 Bolt
SAE-C 2 Bolt - rotated 45°
181
[7.126]
12.7
[0.5]
126.975 ± 0.025
Ø
[4.999 ± 0.001]
90.5
[3.563]
45°
17.5
[0.689]
2X
Ø
NOTE: Available only with angle sensor
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 145
Front Mounting Flange
P108 440E
SAE-B 2 Bolt
57.25
[2.25]
114.
[4.51]
2X
2X
Ø14.4
[0.567]
X4
5
Ø17.5
[0.69]
90.5
[3.56]
181
[7.13]
2X
SAE-C 2 Bolt
SAE-C 4 Bolt
73
[2.87]
146
[5.75]
Ø14.4
[0.567]
77.2
[3.04]
2X
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
146 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Auxiliary mounting pads
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad (integrated)
Dimensions
3.1
[0.12]
53.2
[2.09]
106.4
[4.19]
3/8 -16 UNC-2B THD.
128.5
[5.1]
240.1
[9.45]
8.1
[0.32]
11.1±0.6
[0.44]±0.5
10.4
[0.41]
Ø82.6
+0.08
-0
[3.25 ]
Ø88.62
[3.49]
R1.3 MAX
17.8 [0.70] MIN
FULL THD. DEPTH
2X
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
MOUNTING
FLANGE
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 82.22 [3.23] I.D. x
2.62 [0.103] CROSS SECTION
P/N 5000373
P108 487E
COUPLING-SAE AT
SPLINE:
11 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
17.463 [0.6875] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
COUPLING-SAE AA
SPLINE:
9TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
14.288 [0.5625] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
+0.003
-0
Coupling
clearance
Shaft
clearance
35.1±0.6
[1.38]±0.024
M10 x 1.5-6H THD.
19 [0.75] MIN.
FULL THD. DEPTH
2X
Specifications
Coupling 9-tooth 11-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 13.5 mm [0.53 in] 15 mm [0.59 in]
Maximum torque 107 N•m [950 lbf•in] 147 N•m [1300 lbf•in]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 147
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad (non-integral)
Dimensions
3
[0.12]
9.8
[0.39]
53.2
[2.09]
106.4
[4.19]
3/8 -16 UNC-2B THD
137.1
[5.4]
264.43
[10.41]
58.2
[2.29]
8.1
[0.32]
1.95
[0.08]
14.6 Min. for 9T
15.8 Min. for 11T
Ø82.6
+0.08
-0
[3.25 ]
Ø88.62
[3.49]
R1.2 MAX
17.8 [0.70] MIN
FULL THD DEPTH
2X
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
MOUNTING
FLANGE
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 82.22 [3.23] I.D x
2.62 [0.103] CROSS SECTION
P/N 5000373
P104 230E
COUPLING-SAE AT
SPLINE:
11 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
17.463 [0.6875] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
COUPLING-SAE AA
SPLINE:
9TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
14.288 [0.5625] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
+0.003
-0
Specifications
Coupling 9-tooth 11-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 13.5 mm [0.53 in] 15 mm [0.59 in]
Maximum torque 107 N•m [950 lbf•in] 147 N•m [1300 lbf•in]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
148 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
SAE-B auxiliary mounting pad
Dimensions
73
[2.87]
146
[5.75]
3.1
[0.122]
9.8
[0.39]
260.05
[10.24]
20.6 Min. for 13T
15.6 Min. for 15T
R2.0 MAX
[0.08]
Ø101.65
+0.08
- 0
[4.002 ]
+.003
- 0
Ø105.64
[4.159]
1.3
[0.05]
11 ± 0.12
[0.433 ±0.005]
53.8
[2.12]
136.1
[5.4]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
MIN SHAFT
CLEARANCE
COUPLING-SAE B-BV
SPLINE:
15 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
23.813 [0.9375] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
1/2 -13UNC-2B THD
19.7 [0.76] MIN
THD DEPTH
2X
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 94.97 [3.739] I.D X
1.78 [0.070] CROSS SECTION
P/N 9004104-0440
COUPLING-SAE BB
SPLINE:
13 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
20.638 [0.8125] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
MOUNTING
FLANGE
P104 231E
Specifications
Coupling 13-tooth 15-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 14.2 mm [0.56 in] 18.9 mm [0.74 in]
Maximum torque 249 N•m [2200 lbf•in] 339 N•m [3000 lbf•in]
SAE-C auxiliary mounting pad
Dimensions
14
[0.55]
1.3
[0.05]
12 Min.
[0.47] Min.
Ø131.57
[5.18]
263.05
[10.36]
Ø127.03
+0.05
- 0
[5.001 ]
+.002
- 0
56.8
[2.24]
138.95
[5.5]
57.3
[2.26]
114.6
[4.51]
57.3
[2.26]
114.6
[4.51]
2.9
[0.114]
9.7
[0.38]
MIN SHAFT
CLEARANCE
MOUNTING
FLANGE
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
1/2 -13 UNC-2B THD
22.7 [0.89] MIN
THREAD DEPTH
4X
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 120.37 [4.739] I.D.x
1.78 [0.070] CROSS SECTION
P/N 9004100-0480
COUPLING-SAE CC
SPLINE:
14 TOOTH
12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
29.633 [1.1667] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
P104 232E
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 149
Specifications
Coupling 14-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 18.3 mm [0.72 in]
Maximum torque 339 N•m [3000 lbf•in]
Running cover
250.56
[9.86]
MOUNTING
FLANGE
P104 233E
Radial Endcap Clockwise
Radial endcap counterclockwise
287.3
[11.31]
139.84
[5.51]
20°
60.92
[2.4]
99.4
[3.91]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
150 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Radial Endcap Counterclockwise
Radial Endcap Counterclockwise
P106191
60.92
[2.4]
99.4
[3.91]
139.84
[5.51]
287.3
[11.31]
20°
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 151
Axial Endcap Clockwise
Axial endcap clockwise
141
[5.55]
20°
83.4
[3.28]
76.9
[3.03]
269.0
[10.62]
141.0
[5.55]
Axial Endcap Counterclockwise
Axial endcap counterclockwise
269.0
[10.62]
141.0
[5.55]
20°
83.4
[3.28]
76.9
[3.03]
Displacement limiter
J Frame open circuit pumps are available with an optional adjustable displacement limiter. This
adjustable stop limits the pump’s maximum displacement.
Setting range
J45B 8.4 to 45 cm³ [0.51 to 2.75 in³]
J51B 13.7 to 51 cm³ [0.84 to 3.11 in³]
J60B 16.8 to 60 cm³ [1.03 to 3.66 in³]
J65B 25.4 to 65 cm³ [1.55 to 3.97 in³]
J75B 28.4 to 75 cm³ [1.73 to 4.58 in³]
Displacement per turn
J45B 6.2 cm³/rev [0.38 in³/rev]
J51B 6.2 cm³/rev [0.38 in³/rev]
J60B 6.2 cm³/rev [0.38 in³/rev]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
152 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Displacement per turn (continued)
J65B 7.2 cm³/rev [0.44 in³/rev]
J75B 7.2 cm³/rev [0.44 in³/rev]
Displacement limiter cross-section
P106 727E
Displacement limiters are only available for endcap options V and W.
P106 728E
207.12
[8.2]
167.72
[6.6]
146.5
[5.8]
241.65
[9.5]
162.54
[6.4]
Third-angle
projec tion
mm [in]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame J
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 153
Design
Series 45 Frame F pumps have a single servo piston design with a cradle-type swashplate set in polymer-
coated journal bearings. A bias spring and internal forces increase swashplate angle. The servo piston
decreases swashplate angle. Nine reciprocating pistons displace fluid from the pump inlet to the pump
outlet as the cylinder block rotates on the pump input shaft. The block spring holds the piston slippers to
the swashplate via the slipper retainer. The cylinder block rides on a bi-metal valve plate optimized for
high volumetric efficiency and low noise. Tapered roller bearings support the input shaft and a viton lip-
seal protects against shaft leaks.
An adjustable one spool (PC only, not shown) or two spool (LS and PC) control senses system pressure
and load pressure (LS controls). The control ports system pressure to the servo piston to control pump
output flow.
Frame F cross section
Slipper
LS adjustment
PC adjustmen t
LS spool
PC spool
LS control
(attached to endcap)
Servo piston
Swashplat e
Tapere d
roller
bearing
Shaft seal
Tapered roller
bearing
Input shaf
t
Cylinder
block
Valve
plate
Cylinder
block
spring
Piston
Slipper retainer
Bias spring
P104341
Bias piston
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
154 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Technical Specifications
F Frame
Unit 074B 090C
Maximum Displacement cm³ [in³] 74 [4.52] 90 [5.49]
Working Input
Speed
Minimum min -1 (rpm) 500 500
Continuous 2400 2200
Maximum 2800 2600
Working Pressure Continuous bar [psi] 310 [4500] 260 [3770]
Maximum 400 [5800] 350 [5075]
Flow at rated speed (theoretical) l/min
[US gal/min]
178
[46.9]
198
[52.3]
Input torque at maximum displacement
(theoretical) at 49° C [120°F]
N•m/bar
[lbf•in/1000 psi]
1.178
[719.3]
1.433
[874.8]
Mass moment of inertia of internal rotating
components
kg•m²
[slug•ft²]
0.0063
[0.00465]
0.0065
[0.00479]
Weight Axial ports kg [lb] 29.5 [65.0]
Radial ports 32.6 [71.9]
External Shaft
Loads
External moment (Me) N•m [lbf•in] 300 [2655] 300 [2655]
Thrust in (Tin), out (Tout) N [lbf] 2900 [652] 2900 [652]
Mounting flange
load moments
Vibratory (continuous) N•m [lbf•in] 3730 [33 100]
Shock (maximum) 13220 [117 100]
Order code
Code description
Code Description
R Product Frame, Variable Open Circuit Pump
S Rotation
P Displacement
C Control Type
D Pressure Compensator Setting
E Load Sense Setting
F Not Used
G Choke Orifice
H Gain Orifice
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
K Shaft Seal/Front Mounting Flange/Housing Ports
L Displacement Limiter
M Special Hardware
N Special Features
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 155
R Product
F Frame
074B 090C
FR F Frame, variable displacement open circuit pump
• •
S Rotation
L Left Hand (counterclockwise)
• •
R Right Hand (clockwise)
• •
R Displacement
074B 074 cm3/rev [4.52 in3/rev]
•
090C 090 cm3/rev [5.49 in3/rev]
•
C Control type
074B 090C
PC Pressure Compensator
• •
BC* Pressure Compensator [>280 bar]
•
RP Remote Pressure Compensator
• •
BP* Remote Pressure Compensator [>280 bar]
•
LS Load Sensing/Pressure Comp.
• •
BS* Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. [>280 bar]
•
LB Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. with internal bleed orifice
• •
BB* Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. with internal bleed orifice [>280 bar]
•
AN Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) Left
• •
CN Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) Left
• •
AR Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) Left
• •
CR Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Left
• •
AF Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) Right
• •
AT Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) Right
• •
AG Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) Right
• •
AY Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Right
• •
BN* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
DN* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
BR* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
DR* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
BF* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
DF* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
BE* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
BG* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
AX Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) Left
• •
CL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) Left
•
AH Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Left
• •
AL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Left
• •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
156 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
C Control type (continued)
074B 090C
AW Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) Right
• •
CK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) Right
• •
AV Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Right
• •
AK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Right
• •
BX* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
DL* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
BH* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
BL* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
•
BW* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
DK* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
BM* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
BK* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
•
FA* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 12VDC) Right
• •
FB* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 12VDC) Left
• •
FK Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Right • •
FL Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Left • •
FM • •
TA Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Left • •
TB Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Left • •
TC Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Left • •
TD Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Left • •
TE Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Right • •
TF Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Right • •
TG Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Right • •
TH Electric Torque Limiting w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Right • •
SA Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Left • •
SB Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Left • •
SC Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Left • •
SD Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Left • •
SE Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Right • •
SF Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 100-210 Bar - Right • •
SG Pressure Comp (12 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Right • •
SH Pressure Comp (24 Vdc), 220-310 Bar - Right • •
Left - E-Frame: CW Only, F-Frame: CW Only, J-frame: CW Axial, CCW Radial
Right - E-Frame: CCW Only, F-Frame: CCW Only, J-frame: CCW Axial, CW Radial
* Not available on 90cc pumps
D PC setting (2 digit code, 10 bar increments)
F Frame
074B 090C
Example 25 = 250 bar (3625 psi)
10–26 100 to 260 bar [1450 to 3771 psi]
• •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 157
D PC setting (2 digit code, 10 bar increments) (continued)
F Frame
074B 090C
27-28 270 to 280 bar [3916 to 4061 psi]
•
29-31 290-310 bar [4206 to 4496 psi]
•
E Load sensing setting (2 digit code, 1 bar increments)
Example 20 = 20 bar (290 psi)
10-40 10 to 34 bar [145 to 508 psi]
• •
NN Not applicable (pressure compensated only controls)
• •
F Not used
NN Not applicable
• •
G Servo Control Orifice
N None (standard)
• •
E 0.8 mm diameter
• •
F 1.0 mm diameter
• •
H Gain Orifice
3 1.0 mm diameter (standard orifice)
• •
C 0.8 mm diameter LS signal line orifice for ETL use (with standard orifice) • •
Additional LS signal line orifice size options are available for necessary system tuning requirements.
Contact your Danfoss representative for further information.
J Input Shaft
S1 14 tooth 12/24 pitch
S2 17 tooth, 12/24 pitch
K4 1.25 inch straight keyed
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style
Auxiliary
Description
Endcap Style Inlet Porting Outlet Porting Endcap Description Code
None Axial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
N4
None Radial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
N2
Running Cover Radial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
R2
SAE-A, 9 teeth Radial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
A2
SAE-A, 11 teeth Radial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
T2
SAE-B, 13 teeth Radial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
B2
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
158 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style (continued)
SAE-BB, 15 teeth Radial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
V2
SAE-C, 14 teeth Radial Split Flange Split Flange Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2 inch port 0.5 inch threads)
Outlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1 inch port 0.375 inch threads)
C2
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
Available Combinations
F Frame
074B 090C
K4A2
• •
K4B2
• •
K4C2
• •
K4N2
• •
K4N4
• •
K4R2
• •
K4T2
• •
K4V2
• •
S1A2
• •
S1B2
• •
S1C2
• •
S1N2
• •
S1NB • •
S1N4
• •
S1R2
• •
S1T2
• •
S1V2
• •
F Frame
074B 090C
S2A2
• •
S2B2
• •
S2C2
• •
S2N2
• •
S2N4
• •
S2R2
• •
S2T2
• •
S2V2
• •
K Shaft seal
F Frame
074B 090C
A Single (Viton)
• •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 159
K Mounting flange and housing port style
1 SAE-C Flange 4-bolt/SAE O-ring boss ports (available with or without angle sensor)
• •
3 SAE-B Flange 2-bolt/SAE O-ring boss ports (not available with angle sensor)
• •
G SAE-C Flange 4-bolt/Metric O-ring boss ports (not available with angle sensor) • •
K Angle Sensor Housing
N Without angle sensor
• •
R Angle Sensor Housing, Right Hand Side • •
* When viewing pump from input shaft, control oriented on top
L Displacement limiter
NNN None (plugged)
• •
AAA Adjustable, factory set at max angle
• •
M Special hardware
NNN None
• •
ANS Angle sensor hardware • •
N Special features
NNN None
• •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
160 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance F74B
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0
40
80
120
160
200
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
10
20
30
40
50
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
140
bar [2
030
ps
i]
210 bar [3045 psi]
260 bar [3770 psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 310 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500 1000 1500 2000 2500
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
310 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 161
Performance F90C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Input power vs. speed
Flow vs. speed
Efficiency
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Noise
0
50
100
150
200
250
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Flow (l/min)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
1
2
4
b
a
r [1
7
9
8
p
si]
186
bar
[
2
697
ps
i]
255
bar
[3698
psi]
Power (kW)
Speed min ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 260 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500 1000 1500 2000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
260 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pr
essure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
162 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Hydraulic Controls
Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/recovery times
(msec) Response Recovery
F74B 35 120
F90C 35 135
PC setting range
Model PC BC
F74B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
F90C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
Schematic
B
M2
L2
S
L1
P107 788E
M4
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/recovery times
(msec) Response Recovery
F74B 35 120
F90C 35 135
PC setting range
Model RP BP
F74B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
F90C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 163
An LS Setting of 20 is required for this control
Remote PC schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P107 789E
X
X
B
M4
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
X = Remote PC port
Load Sensing/Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
F74B 35 135
F90C 45 135
PC setting range
Model bar psi
F74B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
F90C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10–30 145–435
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
164 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
X
X
P107 790E
B
M4
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
X = LS signal port
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice/Pressure Compensated
Response/recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
E100B 45 200
E130B 50 200
E147C 60 200
PC setting range
Model LB BB
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E130B
100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10–34 145–435
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 165
Schematic
M2
L2
S L1
X
X
P107 791E
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
X = LS signal port
Electric Controls
Connectors
Description Quantity Ordering Number
Mating Connector 1 Deutsch® DT06-2S
Wedge Lock 1 Deutsch® W25
Socket Contact (16 and 18 AWG) 2 Deutsch® 0462-201-16141
Danfoss mating connector kit 1 K29657
1 2
P003 480
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
166 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Continuous Duty Operating Range
50
60
70
80
90
100
-40
100
Percent of Rated Voltage (%)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
-30
-20
-10
0
60
80
10
20
30
40
50
70
90
110
120
Operating Range
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (310/260 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 200/400 100/200
End Current [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 1200 600
Solenoid Data - Normally Open
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 0 0
End Current [mA] (260/310 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 1000/1100 500/550
Hysteresis
Frame Hysteresis
F74B Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
F90C Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
Fan Drive Control Solenoid Data - Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Maximum Control Current [mA] 1800 920
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
F74B 35 120
F90C 35 135
* Without servo control orifice
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 167
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P108 670E
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AG, AR (12V) BE, BR (12V) AY, CR (24V) BG, DR (24V)
F74B 100-280 bar [1450-4060] psi 290-310 bar [4205-4495] psi 100-280 bar [1450-4060] psi 290-310 bar [4205-4495] psi
F90C 100-260 bar [1450-3770] psi Not Available 100-260 bar [1450-3770] psi Not Available
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
F74B 35 120
F90C 35 135
* Without servo control orifice
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 12 - 40 [174 - 580]
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
168 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Schematic
M2
L2
S L1
P108 669E
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AF, AN (12V) BF, BN (12V) AT, CN (24V) DF, DN (24V)
F74B 100-280 bar [1450-4060] psi 290-310 bar [4205-4495] psi 100-280 bar [1450-4060] psi 290-310 bar [4205-4495] psi
F90C 100-260 bar [1450-3770] psi Not Available 100-260 bar [1450-3770] psi Not Available
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
F74B 35 365 35 280
F90C 35 410 35 315
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P108 668E
B
X
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 169
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AH, AV (12V) BH, BM (12V) AK, AL (24V) BK, BL (24V)
F74B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
F90C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 677E
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
F74B 35 365 35 280
F90C 35 410 35 315
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
170 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109316
B
X
M4
M2
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AW, AX (12V) BW, BX (12V) CK, CL (24V) DK, DL (24V)
F74B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
F90C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 677E
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 171
Normally Closed Electric Torque Limiting Control with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/recovery times
(msec) Response Recovery
F74B 35 120
F90C 35 135
Pin location
2 3
4
1
P200 151
Pinout
Pin Description
1 Supply -
2 Ouput signal 2 - Secondary Signal
3 Output signal 1 - Primary Signal
4 Supply +
PC setting range
Frame TA, TE (12V) TC, TG (12V) TB, TF (24V) TD, TH (24V)
F74B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
F90C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] ps
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] ps
Not Available
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
172 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
F-frame pump with integrated ETL control
P108781
Normally Closed Fan Drive Control
PC setting range
Frame SA , SE (12V) SC, SG (12V) SB, SF (24V) SD, SH (24V)
F074B 100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-310 bar [3190-4495]
psi
100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-310 bar [3190-4495]
psi
F090C 100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-260 bar [3190-3771]
psii
100-210 bar [1450-3045]
psi
220-260 bar [3190-3771]
psii
Fan Drive Control Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P109027
B
Legend
B
S
L1, L2
M2
= Outlet
= Inlet
= Case drain
= System pressure
gauge port
Gain
Orifice
Choke
Orifice
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 173
Input shafts
Shaft data
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
K4 Ø 31.75 mm [1.25 in]
Straight keyed
734 [6495]
Ø31.72 ± 0.02
[1.249 ± .001]
35.19 ± 0.13
[1.385 ±0.005]
SQ. KEY X 28.58 LG
[1.125 ±0.010]
8 ± 0.8
[0.31 ± 0.03]
MOUNTING
FLANGE
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P104 351E
48 ± 0.6
[1.89 ±0.024]
7.938
+0.0
-0.05
[0.3125 ]
+0.0
-0.0020
27.9 max.
19 min.
3.8 max.
5/16-18 thd
Dia. 11.18
S1 14 tooth spline
12/24 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class
6e)
800 [7080]
P104349
Ø25.52 MAX
[1.005]
8 ± 0.8
[0.31 ± 0.03]
28 ± 0.15
[1.102± 0.06]
Ø31.14 ± 0.08
[1.226 ± 0.003]
14 TEETH 12/24 PITCH
29.634 [1.167] PITCH Ø
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH
CLASS 6e. ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
MOUNTING
FLANGE
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
ANSI B92.1B-1996
47.6 ± 0.06
[1.874 ± 0.024]
S2 17 tooth spline
12/24 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class
6e)
1150 [10178]
53.97 ± 0.6
[2.125 ± 0.24]
30.75 MAX
[1.211]
8 ± 0.8
[0.31 ± 0.03]
39.91 ± 0.09
[1.571 ± 0.0035]
Ø37.91 ± 0.09
[1.49 ± 0.0035]
35.983 [1.417] PITCH Ø
17 TEETH 12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
MOUNTING
FLANGE
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
ANSI B92.1B-1996
P104350
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explaination of maximum torque.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
174 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Installation drawings
Axial Ported Endcap
P108 450E
40
[1.57]
45
[1.77]
SYSTEM PORT S
(INLET PORT)
2.00 in -3000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER SAE J518
(CODE 61)
with 1/2 13 UNC
x 27 [1.06] Min.
threads
SERVO PRESSURE
GAUGE PORT M4
SAE J1926/1 3/4-16
10.3
[0.41]
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
ALTERNATE
49.7
[1.96]
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET PORT)
1.00 in -5000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER SAE J518
(CODE 61)
with 3/8-16 UNC
x 22 [0.87] Min.
threads
Split Flange Ports
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
P104347
158.7
[6.25]
89
[3.5]
Ø126.975 ± 0.025
[4.999 ± 0.001]
165.14
[6.5]
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
LS SIGNAL PORT X
SAE J1926 7/16-20
SYSTEM PORT B AND S
143.2
[5.64]
103.54
[4.08]
121.83
[4.8]
15.5
[0.61]
6.44
[0.25]
12.45
[0.49]
227.74
[8.97]
239.74
[9.44]
4X
61.24
[2.41]
53
[2.09]
CASE DRAIN PORT L1
SAE J1926 7/8-14
256.355
[10.09]
57.25
[2.25]
114.5
[4.51]
57.25
[2.25]
114.5
[4.51]
Ø14.3
[0.56]
LS STANDBY
PC PRESSURE
PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
CCWCW
91
[3.58]
143.2
[5.64]
165.14
[6.5]
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
LS SIGNAL PORT X
ALTERNATE
SAE J1926 7/16-20
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 175
Right Fan Drive Control
P109022
287.2
106.8
146.6
67.7
10
Deutsch Connector
DT04-2P
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports
103.54
[4.08]
212.74
[8.38]
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET PORT)
1.00 in -5000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER SAE J518
(CODE 61)
with 3/8-16 UNC
x 22 [0.87] Min.
threads
215.74
[8.49]
SYSTEM PORT S
(INLET PORT)
2.00 in -3000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER SAE J518 (CODE 61)
with 1/2-13 UNC
x 27 [1.06] Min.
threads
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
176 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View
P108 452E
Left Hand Rotation (CCW)
Right Hand Rotation (CW)
SERVO PRESSURE
GAUGE PORT M4
SAE J1926/1 3/4-16
49.7
[1.96]
10.3
[0.41]
75
[2.95]
82
[3.23]
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
49.7
[1.96]
10.3
[0.41]
75
[2.95]
82
[3.23]
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
SYSTEM
PORT S
INLET
SYSTEM
PORT B
OUTLET
SYSTEM
PORT S
INLET
SYSTEM
PORT B
OUTLET
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 177
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
P104 348E
61.24
[2.41]
53
[2.09]
CASE DRAIN PORT L1
SAE J1926 7/8-14
143.2
[5.64]
158.7
[6.25]
103.54
[4.08]
LS SIGNAL PORT X
SAE J1926 7/16-20
256.04
[10.08]
212.74
[8.38]
12.7
[0.5]
Ø126.975 ± 0.025
[4.999 ± 0.001]
89
[3.5]
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
5.98
[0.24]
R1 MAX
[0.04]
16.44
[0.65]
165.14
[6.5]
133.45
[5.25]
4X
SYSTEM PORT B
(OUTLET PORT)
1.00 in -5000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER SAE J518
(CODE 61)
with 3/8-16 UNC
x 22 [0.87] Min.
threads
57.25
[2.25]
114.5
[4.51]
57.25
[2.25]
114.5
[4.51]
Ø14.3
[0.56]
LS STANDBY
PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
PC PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
CCWCW
165.14
[6.5]
143.2
[5.64]
LS SIGNAL PORT X
ALTERNATE
SAE J1926 7/16-20
91
[3.58]
215.74
[8.49]
SYSTEM PORT S
(INLET PORT)
2.00 in -3000 PSI
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER SAE J518 (CODE 61)
with 1/2-13 UNC
x 27 [1.06] Min.
threads
SERVO PRESSURE
SAE J1926 7/16-20
GAGE PORT M4
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
178 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Right Angle Sensor Position Installation Dimensions
P108782
SAE-C 4 Bolt
110.7
[4.36]
138.9
[5.468]
43.2
[1.702]
42.6
[1.677]
36
[1.417]
36
[1.417]
37.1
[1.462]
37.1
[1.462]
86.8
[3.417]
94.1
[3.704]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 179
Front Mounting Flange
P108467E
1.87
[0.074]
5.2
[0.205]
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
LS STANDBY
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
PC PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
CW
Ø14.3
[0.563]
4X
Auxiliary mounting pads
SAE-A auxiliary mounting pad
Dimensions
MOUNTING
FLANGE
P104 342E
53.2
[2.094]
106.4
[4.19]
Ø88.62
[3.49]
1.95
[0.077]
58.5
[2.30]
278.07
[10.95]
136.97
[5.39]
5.39
[0.21]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
9 TOOTH SPLINE, 16/32 PITCH
14.288 [0.5625] PITCH Ø
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1, CLASS 6
11 TOOTH SPLINE, 16/32 PITCH
17.463 [0.6875] PITCH Ø
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1, CLASS 6
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 82.22 [3.23] I.D. X
2.62 [0.103] CROSS SECTION
P/N 5000373
MIN COUPLING
CLEARANCE
A
0.375-16 UNC-2B THD
17.8 [0.70] MIN THD
DEPTH 2X
1.3
[0.05]
(REAR FLANGE OPTION T)
(REAR FLANGE OPTION A)
8.1 ± 0.7
[0.319 ± 0.028]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
275.82
[10.86]
Ø82.6
+0.08
0
[3.252 ]
+0.003
0
Specifications
Coupling 9-tooth 11-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 13.5 mm [0.53 in] 15 mm [0.59 in]
Maximum torque 107 N•m [950 lbf•in] 147 N•m [1300 lbf•in]
Dimension A 14.9 mm [0.59 in] 16.1 mm [0.63 in]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
180 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
SAE-B auxiliary mounting pad
Dimensions
73
[2.87]
146
[5.75]
87
[3.425]
174
[6.85]
Ø101.65
+0.08
0
[4.002 ]
+0.003
0
Ø105.6
[4.16]
0.50-13 UNC-2B THD
19.7 [0.76]
MIN THREAD
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 94.97 [3.739] I.D. X
1.78 [0.070] CROSS SECTION
P/N 9004104-0440
P104 343E
MOUNTING
FLANGE
275.82
[10.86]
136.24
[5.36]
5.42
[0.21]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
13 TOOTH SPLINE, 16/32 PITCH
20.638 [0.8125] PITCH Ø
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1, CLASS 6
(REAR FLANGE OPTION B)
1.32
[0.05]
1.3
[0.051]
54.1
[2.13]
15 TOOTH SPLINE, 16/32 PITCH
23.813 [0.9375] PITCH Ø
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1, CLASS 6
(REAR FLANGE OPTION V)
DEPTH 2X
11±0.12
[0.433±0.005]
MIN COUPLING
CLEARANCE
A
APPROXIMATE
GRAVITY
CENTER OF
273.69
[10.78]
Specifications
Coupling 13-tooth 15-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 14.2 mm [0.56 in] 18.9 mm [0.74 in]
Maximum torque 249 N•m [2200 lbf•in] 339 N•m [3000 lbf•in]
Dimension A 20.7 mm [0.81 in] 12.7 mm [0.5 in]
SAE-C auxiliary mounting pad
Dimensions
57.3
[2.26]
114.6
[4.51]
57.3
[2.26]
114.6
[4.51]
73.25
[2.88]
146.5
[5.77]
Ø131.57
[5.18]
0.50-13 UNC-2B THD
22.7 [0.89]
MIN THD DEPTH 4X
O-RING SEAL REQUIRED
REF 120.37 [4.739] I.D. X
1.78 [0.070] CROSS SECTION
P/N 9004100-0480
P104 344E
MOUNTING
FLANGE
276.69
[10.89]
138.77
[5.46]
5.42
[0.21]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
14 TOOTH SPLINE, 12/24 PITCH
29.633 [1.1667] PITCH Ø
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER ANSI B92.1, CLASS 6
14 ± 0.13
[0.551 ± 0.005]
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
(REAR FLANGE OPTION C)
1.21
[0.05]
1.3
[0.051]
10.09
[0.4]
MINIMUM
COUPLING
CLEARANCE
57.1
[2.25]
MINIMUM
SHAFT
CLEARANCE
Ø127.03
+0.08
0
[5.001 ]
+0.003
0
236.14
[9.3]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 181
Specifications
Coupling 14-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 18.3 mm [0.72 in]
Maximum torque 339 N•m [3000 lbf•in]
Running Cover
Dimensions
MOUNTING
FLANGE
264.2
[10.4]
275.82
[10.86]
P104 346E
Axial Endcap Clockwise
P108 457E
97.1
[3.82]
271
[10.67]
166.57
[6.558]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
182 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Radial Endcap Counterclockwise
P108 455E
271
[10.67]
166.57
[6.558]
97.117
[3.824]
Axial Endcap Clockwise
P108 456E
97.117
[3.824]
270.33
[10.643]
166.57
[6.558]
Axial Endcap Counterclockwise
P108 457E
97.1
[3.82]
271
[10.67]
166.57
[6.558]
Displacement limiter
Series 45 F90C and F74B open circuit pumps are available with an optional adjustable displacement
limiter. This adjustable stop limits the pump’s maximum displacement.
Setting range
F90C 45.6 to 90 cm³ [2.78 to 5.49 in³]
F74B 34.1 to 74 cm³ [1.92 to 4.52 in³]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 183
Displacement per turn
F90C 6.8 cm³/rev [0.41 in³/rev]
F74B 6.1 cm³/rev [0.37 in³/rev]
Displacement limiter cross-section
P104 345
P108 469E
264.2
[10.4]
258.62
[10.18]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame F
184 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Design
Series 45 Frame E pumps have a single servo piston design with a cradle-type swashplate set in polymer-
coated journal bearings. A bias spring and internal forces increase swashplate angle. The servo piston
decreases swashplate angle. Nine reciprocating pistons displace fluid from the pump inlet to the pump
outlet as the cylinder block rotates on the pump input shaft. The block spring holds the piston slippers to
the swashplate via the slipper retainer. The cylinder block rides on a bi-metal valve plate optimized for
high volumetric efficiency and low noise. Tapered roller bearings support the input shaft and a viton lip-
seal protects against shaft leaks.
An adjustable one spool (PC only, not shown) or two spool (LS and PC) control senses system pressure
and load pressure (LS controls). The control ports system pressure to the servo piston to control pump
output flow.
Frame E cross section
Adjustable
displacemen t
limiter
Lifting lug
Displacement piston
Displacement piston guide
Swashplate
Input shaf t
Shaft seal
Bias piston
Bias spring
Cylinder
block
Bias piston guide
Piston
Slipper
Block
spring
Valve plate
Tapere d
roller
bearing
Slipper retainer
Tapere d
roller
bearin g
LS adjustment
PC adjustmen t
LS spool
PC spool
LS control
(attached to endcap)
P104001
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 185
Technical Specifications
E Frame
Unit 100B 130B 147C
Maximum Displacement cm³ [in³] 100 [6.1] 130 [7.93] 147 [8.97]
Working Input
Speed
Minimum min -1 (rpm) 500 500 500
Continuous 2450 2200 2100
Maximum 2880 2600 2475
Working Pressure Continuous bar [psi] 310 [4500] 310 [4500] 260 [3770]
Maximum 400 [5800] 400 [5800] 350 [5075]
Flow at rated speed (theoretical) l/min
[US gal/min]
245
[64.7]
286
[75.6]
309
[81.6]
Input torque at maximum displacement
(theoretical) at 49° C [120°F]
N•m/bar
[lbf•in/1000 psi]
1.592
[972]
2.07
[1263.6]
2.341
[1428.8]
Mass moment of inertia of internal rotating
components
kg•m²
[slug•ft²]
0.0128
[0.00944]
0.0128
[0.00944]
0.0128
[0.00944]
Weight Axial ports kg [lb] 51.3 [113]
Radial ports 54.9 [121]
External Shaft
Loads
External moment (Me) N•m [lbf•in] 455 [4027] 360 [3186] 396 [3505]
Thrust in (Tin), out (Tout) N [lbf] 2846 [640] 1735 [390] 2113 [475]
Mounting flange
load moments
Vibratory (continuous) N•m [lbf•in] 1920 [17000]
Shock (maximum) 6779 [60000]
Order code
Code description
Code Description
R Product Frame, Variable Open Circuit Pump
S Rotation
P Displacement
C Control Type
D Pressure Compensator Setting
E Load Sense Setting
F Not Used
G Choke Orifice
H Gain Orifice
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
K Shaft Seal/Front Mounting Flange/Housing Ports
L Displacement Limiter
M Special Hardware
N Special Features
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
186 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
R Product
E Frame
100B 130B 147C
ER E Frame, variable displacement open circuit pump
• • •
S Rotation
L Left Hand (counterclockwise)
• • •
R Right Hand (clockwise)
• • •
P Displacement
100B 100 cm³/rev [6.10 in³/rev]
•
130B 130 cm³/rev [7.93 in³/rev]
•
147C 147 cm³/rev [8.97 in³/rev]
•
C Control type
100B 130B 147C
PC Pressure Compensator
• • •
BC* Pressure Compensator [>280 bar]
• •
RP Remote Pressure Compensator
• • •
BP* Remote Pressure Compensator [>280 bar]
• •
FM* Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) Left • • •
LS Load Sensing/Pressure Comp.
• • •
BS* Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. [>280 bar]
• •
LB Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. with internal bleed orifice
• • •
BB* Load Sensing/Pressure Comp. with internal bleed orifice [>280 bar]
• •
AN Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) Left
• • •
CN Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) Left
• • •
AR Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) Left
• • •
CR Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Left
• • •
AF Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) Right
• • •
AT Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) Right
• • •
AG Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) Right
• • •
AY Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) Right
• • •
BN* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
DN* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
BR* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
DR* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
BF* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• •
DF* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NO, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• •
BE* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 12VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• •
BG* Electric On/Off w/Pressure Comp. (NC, 24VDC) [>280 bar] Right
• •
AX Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) Left
• • •
CL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) Left
• •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 187
C Control type (continued)
100B 130B 147C
AH Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Left
• • •
AL Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Left
• • •
AW Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) Right
• • •
CK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) Right
• • •
AV Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) Right
• • •
AK Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) Right
• • •
BX* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
DL* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
BH* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
BL* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) [>280 bar] Left
• •
BW* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,12VDC) [>280 bar]
Right
• •
DK* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NO,24VDC) [>280 bar]
Right
• •
BM* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,12VDC) [>280 bar]
Right
• •
BK* Electric Proportional Pressure Control w/Pressure Comp. (NC,24VDC) [>280 bar]
Right
• •
FA* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 12VDC) Right
• • •
FB* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 12VDC) Left
• • •
FE* Electric On/Off Dump valve w/Pressure Comp. + Load Sense (NC, 24VDC), Left
• • •
TA Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
12VDC), Left
• • •
TB Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
24VDC), Left
• • •
TC Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
12VDC), (>280bar) Left
• • •
TD Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
12VDC), (>280bar) Left
• • •
TE Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
12VDC), Right
• • •
TF Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
24VDC), Right
• • •
TG Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
12VDC), (>280bar) Right
• • •
TH Electronic Torque Limiting Control w/Pressure Compensation/Load Sensing (NC,
24VDC), (>280bar) Right
• • •
Left - E-Frame: CW Only, F-Frame: CW Only, J-frame: CW Axial, CCW Radial
Right - E-Frame: CCW Only, F-Frame: CCW Only, J-frame: CCW Axial, CW Radial
* Not available on 147cc pumps
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
188 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
D PC setting (2 digit code, 10 bar increments)
E Frame
100B 130B 147C
Example 25 = 250 bar (3625 psi)
10–26 100 to 260 bar [1450 to 3771 psi]
• • •
27-28 270 to 280 bar [3916 to 4061 psi]
• •
29-31 290-310 bar [4206 to 4496 psi]
• •
E Load sensing setting (2 digit code, 1 bar increments)
Example 20 = 20 bar (290 psi)
10-34 10 to 34 bar [145 to 508 psi]
• • •
NN Not applicable (pressure compensated only controls)
• • •
F Not used
NN Not applicable
• • •
G Servo Control Orifice
N None (standard)
• • •
E 0.8 mm diameter
• • •
F 1.0 mm diameter
• • •
H Gain Orifice
3 1.0 mm diameter
• • •
C 0.8 mm diameter Electronic Torque Limiting Control Orifice (with
standard orifice)
• • •
Additional LS signal line orifice size options are available for necessary system tuning requirements.
Contact your Danfoss representative for further information.
J Input Shaft
K5 1.5 inch straight keyed
S1 14 tooth 12/24 pitch
S2 17 tooth, 12/24 pitch
S4 13 tooth, 8/16 pitch
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style
Auxiliary
Description
Endcap
Style
Inlet
Porting
Outlet
Porting
Endcap Description Code
None Axial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
NL
None
Axial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port M12
metric threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
M12 metric threads)
N1
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 189
Auxiliary Mount/Endcap Style (continued)
None Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
NP
N1 Endcap
Option
Running
Cover
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
RP
SAE-A, 11
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
TP
SAE-A, 9
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
AP
SAE-B, 13
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
BP
SAE-B, 14
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
LP
SAE-BB, 13
teeth/with
M12 thread
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port M12
metric threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
M12 metric threads)
U6
SAE-BB, 15
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
VP
SAE-C, 14
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
CP
SAE-CC, 17
teeth
Radial Split
Flange
Split
Flange
Inlet - Code 61 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (2.5 inch port 0.5
inch threads)
Outlet - Code 62 Split Flange Port 4 Bolt (1.25 inch port
0.5 inch threads)
WP
J Input Shaft/Auxiliary Mount/Endcap
Available Combinations
E Frame
100B 130B 147C
K5AP
• • •
K5BP
• • •
K5CP
• • •
K5NL
• • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
190 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
E Frame
100B 130B 147C
K5NP
• • •
K5RP
• • •
K5VP
• • •
S1AP
• • •
S1BP
• • •
S1CP
• • •
S1LP
• • •
S1NL
• • •
S1N1 • • •
S1NP
• • •
S1RP
• • •
S1TP
• • •
S1VP
• • •
S2AP
• • •
E Frame
100B 130B 147C
S2BP
• • •
S2CP
• • •
S2NL
• • •
S2NP
• • •
S2RP
• • •
S2TP
• • •
S2VP
• • •
S2WP
• • •
S4AP
• • •
S4BP
• • •
S4CP
• • •
S4NL
• • •
S4NP
• • •
S4RP
• • •
S4U6
• • •
S4TP
• • •
S4VP
• • •
S4WP
• • •
K Shaft seal
E Frame
100B 130B 147C
A Single (Viton)
• • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 191
K Mounting flange and housing port style
1 SAE-C Flange 4-bolt/SAE O-ring boss ports
• • •
K Angle Sensor Housing
R Angle Sensor Housing, Right Hand Side
• • •
L Displacement limiter
NNN None (plugged)
• • •
AAA Adjustable, factory set at max angle
• • •
M Special hardware
NNN None
• • •
ANS Angle Sensor Swashplate • • •
N Special features
NNN None
• • •
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
192 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance E100B
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed mi n (rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pressure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
P104017
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
0
50
100
150
200
250
0 500 1000 1500 2000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Flow (l/min)
Speed mi n ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
0 500 1000 1500 2000
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
Power (kW)
Speed mi n ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
140
bar
[2030
psi
]
210
bar
[3
045
ps
i]
310
bar
[4495
psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0 500 1000 150 0
2000 250 0
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 310 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500 1000
1500 200 0 250 0
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
310 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
Flow vs. speed Input power vs. speed
Efficiency Noise
Inlet pressure vs. speed
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 193
Performance E130B
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
Inlet pressure vs. speed
Input power vs. speedFlow vs. speed
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
0 500 1000 1500 2000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Fl
ow (l/min)
Speed min (rpm)
-1
Fl
ow (US gal/min)
0
30
60
90
120
150
0 500 1000 1500 2000
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
Po
wer (kW)
Speed min (rpm)
-1
Po
wer (hp)
310 bar [4495 psi]
210
bar
[3045
psi]
140
bar [2030
psi]
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed min (rpm)
-1
t
e
l
n
I
r
P
)
s
b
a
r
a
b
(
e
r
u
s
s
e
)
e
g
u
a
g
i
s
p
(
v
g
H
n
i
(
)
c
a
P109281
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Efficiency Noise
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0
500 1000 1500 2000
Effi
cien
cy
(%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 310 Bar -Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs -Inlet Temperature: 49C
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500
1000
1500 2000
No
is
e
(D
BA
)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
310 bar - No
Fl
ow
140 bar -
Fu
ll
Fl
ow
General Operating Rang
e
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
194 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Performance E147C
Flow and power data valid at 49°C [120°F] and viscosity of 17.8 mm²/sec [88 SUS].
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
100% 90% 80%
Shaft Speed mi n ( rpm)
-1
Inlet
Pressure (bar abs)
(psi gauge)
(in Hg v
ac)
P104019
0
3
6
9
8
6
4
2
1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
0 500 1000 1500 2000
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Flow (l/min)
Speed mi n ( rpm)
-1
Flow (US gal/min)
P104 012E
0
30
60
90
120
150
0 500 1000 1500 2000
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
Power (kW)
Speed mi n ( rpm)
-1
Power (hp)
P104 013E
140
bar [2030
psi]
210
bar
[3045
psi]
260
bar [3
770
psi]
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
0 500
1000 1500 2000
Efficiency (%)
Input Speed (rpm)
System Pressure: 260 Bar - Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
P108 462E
Volumetric Efficiency
Overall Efficiency
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
0
500 100 0
1500
2000
Noise (DBA)
Input Speed (rpm)
Inlet Pressure: 1.0 Bar abs - Inlet Temperature: 49C
P108 463E
210 bar - No Flow
140 bar - Full Flow
General Operating Range
Inlet pressure vs. speed
NoiseEfficiency
Input power vs. speedFlow vs. speed
The chart above shows allowable inlet pressure and speed at various displacements. Greater speeds and
lower inlet pressures are possible at reduced displacement. Operating outside of acceptable limits
reduces pump life.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 195
Hydraulic Controls
Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/recovery times
(ms) Response Recovery
E100B 45 175
E130B 55 175
E147C 60 190
PC Setting range
Model PC BC
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E130B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
Schematic
B
M1
L2
S
L1
M4
M2
P104 025
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
Remote Pressure Compensated Controls
Response/recovery times
(ms) Response Recovery
E100B 45 175
E130B 55 175
E147C 60 190
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
196 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
PC Setting range
Model RP BP
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E130B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
Schematic
X
X
M2
M4
L1
S
L2
M1
B
P104 022
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
X = Remote PC port
Load Sensing/Pressure Compensated
Response/recovery times
(ms) Response Recovery
E100B 45 200
E130B 50 200
E147C 60 200
PC Setting range
Model LS BS
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E130B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 197
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10–30 145–435
Schematic
X
X
M2
M4
L1
S
L2
M1
B
P104 024
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
X = LS signal port
Load Sensing Control with Bleed Orifice/Pressure Compensated
Response/recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
E100B 45 200
E130B 50 200
E147C 60 200
PC setting range
Model LB BB
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E130B
100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10–34 145–435
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
198 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Schematic
M2
L2
S L1
X
X
P107 791E
B
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
M4 = Servo pressure gauge port
X = LS signal port
Electric Controls
Connectors
Description Quantity Ordering Number
Mating Connector 1 Deutsch® DT06-2S
Wedge Lock 1 Deutsch® W25
Socket Contact (16 and 18 AWG) 2 Deutsch® 0462-201-16141
Danfoss mating connector kit 1 K29657
1 2
P003 480
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 199
Continuous Duty Operating Range
50
60
70
80
90
100
-40
100
Percent of Rated Voltage (%)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
-30
-20
-10
0
60
80
10
20
30
40
50
70
90
110
120
Operating Range
Solenoid Data - Normally Closed
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (310/260 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 200/400 100/200
End Current [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 1200 600
Solenoid Data - Normally Open
Voltage 12V 24V
Threshold Control [mA] (20 bar LS setting, oil temp X) 0 0
End Current [mA] (260/310 bar PC setting, oil temp X) 1000/1100 500/550
Hysteresis
Frame Hysteresis
E100B, E130B Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
E147C Input hysteresis <4% (control current):
Output hysteresis <4.5% (system pressure)
Normally Closed Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
E100B 45 175
E130B 55 175
E147C 60 190
* Without servo control orifice
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
200 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P108 670E
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
PC setting range
Frame AG, AR (12V) BE, BR (12V) AY, CR (24V) BG, DR (24V)
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
E130B
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
Normally Open Electric On/Off with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times*
(msec) Response Recovery
E100B 45 175
E130B 55 175
E147C 60 190
* Without servo control orifice
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 201
Schematic
M2
L2
S L1
P108 669E
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
PC setting range
Frame AF, AN (12V) BF, BN (12V) AT, CN (24V) DF, DN (24V)
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
E130B
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
Normally Closed Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
E100B 45 530 45 405
E130B 55 530 55 405
E147C 60 580 60 440
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
202 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P108 668E
B
X
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AH, AV (12V) BH, BM (12V) AK, AL (24V) BK, BL (24V)
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
E130B
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 677E
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 203
Normally Open Electric Proportional with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/Recovery times
0.8mm Orifice 1.0mm Orifice
(msec) Response Recovery Response Recovery
E100B 45 530 45 405
E130B 55 530 55 405
E147C 60 580 60 440
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
Schematic
M2
L2
S
L1
P108 667E
B
X
M4
M2
B = Outlet
S = Inlet
L1, L2 = Case drain
M2 = System pressure gauge port
X = Load Sense Port
PC setting range
Frame AW, AX (12V) BW, BX (12V) CK, CL (24V) DK, DL (24V)
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
100-280 bar
[1450-4060] psi
290-310 bar
[4205-4495] psi
E130B
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available 100-260 bar
[1450-3770] psi
Not Available
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
Electric proportional controls have a unique relationship between margin (LS) setting and low pressure
standby. See the graph below for this relationship.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
204 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Low Pressure Standby [Bar]
Margin (LS) Setting [Bar]
Frames E, F, J Electric Proportional Control
Low Pressure Standby
P108 677E
Normally Closed Electric Torque Limiting Control with Pressure Compensation Controls
Response/recovery times
(ms) Response Recovery
E100B 45 200
E130B 50 200
E147C 60 200
Pin location
2 3
4
1
P200 151
Pinout
Pin Description
1 Supply -
2 Ouput signal 2 - Secondary Signal
3 Output signal 1 - Primary Signal
4 Supply +
PC Setting range
Frame TA, TE (12Vdc) TC, TG (12Vdc) TB, TF (24Vdc) TD, TH (24Vdc)
E100B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E130B 100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
100-280 bar
[1450-4060 psi]
290-310 bar
[4205-4495 psi]
E147C 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A 100-260 bar
[1450-3770 psi]
N/A
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 205
LS setting range
Model bar psi
All 10 - 40 [145 - 580]
For fan-drive systems, and systems with motors, select an LS setting no less than15 bar to enhance
system stability. As the LS setting is reduced, the risk for system instability may be increased. A 20 bar LS
setting is recommended as a starting point for all new applications.
E-frame pump with integrated ETL control
P108724
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
206 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Input shafts
Shaft data
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
K5 Ø 38.08 mm [1.5 in]
Straight keyed
1161 [10 270]
9.525 [0.375]
X 38.1 [1.5] LONG
SQUARE KEY
Ø38.075 ± 0.025
[1.5 ± 0.0009]
8 ± 0.8
[0.31 ± 0.03]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P104 037E
Ø42.26 ±0.125
[1.664 ±0.005]
23.5 max.
16.5 min.
3.8 max.
M8x1.25-6H thd
Dia. 11.18
54.0
±
0.63
[2.13
± 0.025]
S1 14-tooth spline
12/24 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class
6e)
800 [7080]
Ø31.14
±
0.08
[1.226
± 0.003]
14 TOOTH
12/24 PITCH
29.634 [1.167] PITCH
Ø
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH ANSI B92.1B-1996
CLASS 6e - ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
P104038
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND THIS POINT
8
±
0.8
[0.31
± 0.03]
Ø
48.0
±
0.55
[1.89
± 0.022]
Ø25.23 Max.
[0.99
]
28
±
0.15
[1.10
± 0.059]
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
S2 17-tooth spline
12/24 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class
6e)
1150 [10178]
34
±
0.15
Ø36.66
±
0.08
[1.443
± 0.003]
[1.339
± 0.006]
Ø30.75 [1.211] MAX
8
±
0.8
[0.31
± 0.03]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
17 TOOTH
12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
35.983 [1.417] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
ANSI B92.1B-1996
P104036
54.0
±
0.55
[2.13
± 0.022]
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explanation of maximum torque.
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 207
Shaft data
Code Description Maximum torque rating¹
N•m [lbf•in]
Drawing
S4 13-tooth spline
8/16 pitch
(ANSI B92.1B 1996 - Class
6e)
1560 [13 807]
Ø43.94
±
0.08
[1.73
± 0.003]
Ø34.25
[1.348] MAX
42
±
0.15
[1.654
± 0.006]
13 TOOTH
8/16 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
41.28 [1.625] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
COMPATIBLE WITH
ANSI B92.1B-1996
CLASS 6e ALSO MATES WITH
FLAT ROOT SIDE FIT
8
±
0.8
[0.31
± 0.03]
COUPLING MUST NOT
PROTRUDE BEYOND
THIS POINT
P104035
67.0
±
0.55
[2.64
± 0.022]
1. See Input shaft torque ratings for an explanation of maximum torque.
Installation drawings
Axial Ported Endcap
P108 464E
DISPLACEMENT
LIMITER PORT
PER
ISO 11926-1
SAE J1926/1
3/4 - 16UNF - 2B
50
[1.969]
50
[1.969]
27.3
[1.075]
66.7
[2.626]
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
PORT X
Ø63.5
[2.50]
INLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘S’
172 BAR [2500 PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER
ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 61
WITH 1/2 - 13UNC
X 30 [1.181]
MIN THD
88.9
[3.50]
66.68
[2.63]
31.75
[1.25]
SYSTEM PRESSURE
GAGE PORT ‘M2’
PER
ISO 11926 - 1
SAE J1926/1
9/16 - 18UNF - 2B
Ø31.8
[1.25]
OUTLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘B’
414 BAR [6000 PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER
ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 62
WITH 1/2 - 13UNC
X 25 [0.984]
MIN THD
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
208 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Axial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
P106 176E
275
[10.827]
167.4
[6.591]
191.1
[7.524]
R1 MAX
[0.04]
282.315
[11.115]
111.9
[4.406]
Ø126.975 ± 0.025
[4.999 ±0.001]
182.9
[7.201]
132
[5.197]
12.45
[0.49]
302.7 MAX
[11.92]
98
[3.858]
98
[3.858]
52
[2.047]
76
[2.992]
SYSTEM PORTS S AND B
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SPOTFACE DEPTH
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
7/16-20UNF-2B
SAE J1926/1
SERVO
PRESSURE
PORT M4
SAE J1926/1
9/16-18UNF-2B
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SAE J1926/1
1 1/16-12UN-2B
19.09
[0.751]
4X
PER ISO 11926-1
PER ISO 11926-1
PER ISO 11926-1
1.87
[0.074]
5.2
[0.205]
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
111.9
[4.406]
148.05
[5.829]
191.1
[7.524]
167.4
[6.591]
LS STANDBY
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
PC PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SPOTFACE DEPTH
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
SAE J1926/1
7/16-20UNF-2B
CW
Ø14.3
[0.563]
4X
PER ISO 11926-1
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 209
Radial Ported Endcap Installation Dimensions
31.75
[1.25]
302.7 MAX
[11.92]
111.9
[4.406]
167.4
[6.591]
Ø126.975 ± 0.025
[4.999 ± 0.001]
191.1
[7.524]
304
[11.969]
251
[9.882]
R1 MAX
[0.04]
12.7
[0.5]
182.9
[7.201]
132
[5.197]
52
[2.047]
76
[2.992]
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
SAE J1926/1
7/16-20UNF-2B
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SPOTFACE DEPTH
SERVO
PRESSURE
PORT M4
SAE J1926/1
9/16-18UNF-2B
CASE DRAIN
PORT L1
SAE J1926/1
1 1/16-12UN-2B
19.09
[0.751]
4X
Ø31.8
[1.25]
OUTLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘B’
414 BAR [6000 PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER
ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 62
WITH 1/2 - 13UNC
X 25 [0.984]
MIN THD
PER ISO 11926-1
66.68
[2.63]
PER ISO 11926-1
PER ISO 11926-1
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
2.02
[0.08]
4.86
[0.192]
156.79
[6.173]
251
[9.882]
191.1
[7.524]
167.4
[6.591]
111.9
[4.406]
LS STANDBY
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
PC PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
CASE DRAIN
PORT L2
SPOTFACE DEPTH
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
SAE J1926/1
7/16-20UNF-2B
APPROXIMATE
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
CW
Ø14.3
[0.563]
4X
P106 178E
Ø63.5
[2.50]
INLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘S’
172 BAR [2500 PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 61
WITH 1/2 - 13UNC
X 30 [1.181]
MIN THD
PER ISO 11926-1
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
210 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Right Angle Sensor Position Installation Dimensions
The location convention for the E-Frame angle sensor is different from that of the J & F-Frame due to a
difference in design of the endcap and servo systems. When looking at the input shaft, the angle sensor
will be positioned on the same side as the outlet port of the endcap. The outlet port of the endcap is
always the smaller of the inlet and outlet ports, indicated below. This is the ‘right side’ order code
location, even though it appears on the left hand side from a frontal view.
Clockwise rotation E-frames appear with the control on the top side in this view. Counter-clockwise
rotation E-Frames appear with the control on the bottom side in this view.
P108826
36
[1.42]
Outlet Port
36
[1.42]
59.4
[2.34]
126.9
[5.0]
120
[4.72]
Approximate
Wire Length
131.5
[5.18]
111.5
[4.39]
101.5
[4]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 211
Radial Ported Endcap Rear View
27.3
[1.075]
66.7
[2.626]
100.5
[3.957]
100.5
[3.957]
SYSTEM
PORT B
SYSTEM
PORT S
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
DISPLACEMENT
LIMITER PORT
SAE J1926/1
3/4-16UNF-2B
P108 466E
PER ISO 11926-1
SYSTEM PRESSURE
GAGE PORT M2
SAE J1926/1
9/16-18UNF-2B
PER ISO 11926-1
SYSTEM PRESSURE
GAGE PORT ‘M2’
PER
ISO 11926 - 1
SAE J1926/1
9/16 - 18UNF - 2B
DISPLACEMENT
LIMITER PORT
PER
ISO 11926-1
SAE J1926/1
3/4 - 16UNF - 2B
27.3
[1.075]
66.7
[2.626]
100.5
[3.957]
100.5
[3.957]
ALTERNATE
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
LS SIGNAL
PORT X
SYSTEM
PORT B
SYSTEM
PORT S
Radial Ported Endcap Split Flange Ports
251
[9.882]
132
[5.197]
P108 465E
Ø31.8
[1.25]
OUTLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘B’
414 BAR [6000 PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER
ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 62
WITH 1/2 - 13UNC
X 25 [0.984]
MIN THD
251
[9.882]
Ø63.5
[2.50]
INLET
SYSTEM PORT ‘S’
172 BAR [2500 PSI]
SPLIT FLANGE BOSS
PER ISO 6162
SAE J518
CODE 61
WITH 1/2 - 13UNC
X 30 [1.181]
MIN THD
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
212 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Front Mounting Flange
P108467E
1.87
[0.074]
5.2
[0.205]
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
57.25
[2.254]
114.5
[4.508]
LS STANDBY
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
PC PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
CW
Ø14.3
[0.563]
4X
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 213
Endcap Dimensions
114.450
[4.50]
190.8
Radial Endcap Clockwise
Radial Endcap Counterclockwise
Axial Endcap Clockwise
Axial Endcap Counterclockwise
296.9
[11.69]
[7.51]
114.2
[4.50]
296.9
[11.69]
190.8
[7.51]
114.2
[4.50]
296.9
[11.69]
190.8
[7.51]
114.2
[4.50]
296.9
[11.69]
190.8
[7.51]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
214 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Auxiliary mounting pads
SAE-A Dimensions
P104 068E
Ø82.6
+0.076
0
[3.252 ]
+.003
0
Ø88.62
[3.489]
301.7
[11.878]
1.956
[0.077]
8.1±0.7
[0.319 ±0.028]
COUPLING-SAE A:
SPLINE: 11 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
17.463 [0.6875] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER SAE B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
COUPLING-SAE A:
SPLINE: 9 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
4.288 [0.5625] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER SAE B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
42.71
[1.68]
MIN SHAFT
CLEARANCE
8.51
[0.33]
MIN COUPLING
CLEARANCE
MOUNTING
FLANGE
O-RING SEAL
REQUIRED
REFERENCE
82.22 [3.237] I.D.
2.62 [0.103] CROSS SECTION
P/N 5000373
Ø10.4±0.12
3/8-16 UNC-2B THD
18 [0.71] MIN
THD DEPTH
4X
53.2
[2.094]
2X
106.4
[4.189]
2X
Specifications
Coupling 9-tooth 11-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 13.5 mm [0.53 in] 13.5 mm [0.53 in]
Maximum torque 107 N•m [950 lbf•in] 147 N•m [1300 lbf•in]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 215
SAE-B Dimensions
P104 066E
1.956
[0.077]
328.2
[12.921]
Ø107.82
[4.245]
Ø101.65
+0.076
0
[4.002 ]
+.003
0
1/2 -13UNC-2B THD
26.25 [1.03] MIN
THD DEPTH
4X
COUPLING-SAE B:
SPLINE: 13 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
20.638 [0.8125] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER SAE B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
COUPLING-SAE B-B:
SPLINE: 15 TOOTH
16/32 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
23.813 [0.9375] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER SAE B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
A
MIN COUPLING
CLEARANCE
B
MIN SHAFT
CLEARANCE
MOUNTING
FLANGE
O-RING SEAL
REQUIRED
REFERENCE
101.27 [3.987] I.D. x
2.62 [0.103] CROSS SECTION
P/N 9004100-1550
146
[5.748]
2X
73
[2.874]
2X
COUPLING-SAE C:
SPLINE: 14 TOOTH
12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
29.633 [1.16665] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
L option (not SAE)
Specifications
Coupling 13 tooth 15 tooth 14 tooth
Spline Minimum Engagement 14.2 [0.559] 16.1 [0.634] 18.3 [0.720]
Maximum Torque 249 N•m [2200 lbf•in] 339 N•m [3000 lbf•in] 452 N•m [4000 lbf•in]
Dimension A 9.21 [0.36] 9.21 [0.36] 32.11 [1.26]
Dimension B 68.91 [2.71] 68.91 [2.71] 57.31 [2.256]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
216 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
SAE-C Dimensions
P104 067E
328.2
[12.921]
57.31 Min. 14T
63.31 Min. 17T
Shaft clearance
Coupling clearance
1.956
[0.077]
Ø127.05
+0.076
0
[5.002 ]
+.003
0
Ø134.06
[5.278]
57.3
[2.256]
114.6
[4.512]
57.3
[2.256]
114.6
[4.512]
MOUNTING
FLANGE
32.11 Min. 14T
COUPLING-SAE C-C:
SPLINE:17 TOOTH
12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
35.992 [1.417] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT SIDE FIT
PER SAE B92.1-1970 CLASS 6
COUPLING-SAE C:
SPLINE:14 TOOTH
12/24 PITCH
30° PRESSURE ANGLE
29.633 [1.1667] PITCH DIA
FILLET ROOT
O-RING SEAL
REQUIRED
REFERENCE
126.67 [4.987]
I.D. x
2.62 [0.103]
P/N 5000755
CROSS SECTION
Ø12.7±0.12
1/2 -13 UNC-2B THD
26.25 [1.03] MIN
THD DEPTH
4X
37.11 Min. 17T
Specifications
Coupling 14-tooth 17-tooth
Spline minimum engagement 18.3 mm [0.72 in] 18.3 mm [0.72 in]
Maximum torque 452 N•m [4000 lbf•in] 452 N•m [4000 lbf•in]
Displacement Limiters
E Frame open circuit pumps are available with an optional adjustable displacement limiter. This
adjustable stop limits the pump’s maximum displacement.
Setting range
E100B 40 to 100 cm³ [2.44 to 6.1 in³]
E130B 70 to 130 cm³ [4.27 to 7.93 in³]
E147C 87 to 147 cm³ [5.31 to 8.97 in³]
Displacement per turn
E100B 8.4 cm³/rev [0.51 in³/rev]
E130B 8.4 cm³/rev [0.51 in³/rev]
E147C 8.4 cm³/rev [0.51 in³/rev]
Displacement limiter cross-section
P104 003
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 217
Dimensions
P108 470E
304
[11.969]
302.7 max.
[11.92]
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
Frame E
218 |
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Technical Information
Series 45 Pumps
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901 | 219
Danfoss Power Solutions is a global manufacturer and supplier of high-quality hydraulic and
electronic components. We specialize in providing state-of-the-art technology and solutions
that excel in the harsh operating conditions of the mobile off-highway market. Building on
our extensive applications expertise, we work closely with our customers to ensure
exceptional performance for a broad range of off-highway vehicles.
We help OEMs around the world speed up system development, reduce costs and bring
vehicles to market faster.
Danfoss – Your Strongest Partner in Mobile Hydraulics.
Go to www.powersolutions.danfoss.com for further product information.
Wherever off-highway vehicles are at work, so is Danfoss. We offer expert worldwide support
for our customers, ensuring the best possible solutions for outstanding performance. And
with an extensive network of Global Service Partners, we also provide comprehensive global
service for all of our components.
Please contact the Danfoss Power Solution representative nearest you.
Local address:
Danfoss
Power Solutions GmbH & Co. OHG
Krokamp 35
D-24539 Neumünster, Germany
Phone: +49 4321 871 0
Danfoss
Power Solutions ApS
Nordborgvej 81
DK-6430 Nordborg, Denmark
Phone: +45 7488 2222
Danfoss
Power Solutions (US) Company
2800 East 13th Street
Ames, IA 50010, USA
Phone: +1 515 239 6000
Danfoss
Power Solutions Trading
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Building #22, No. 1000 Jin Hai Rd
Jin Qiao, Pudong New District
Shanghai, China 201206
Phone: +86 21 3418 5200
Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to products
already on order provided that such alterations can be made without changes being necessary in specifications already agreed.
All trademarks in this material are property of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.
©
Danfoss | March 2018 520L0519 | BC00000019en-000901
Products we offer:
•
Bent Axis Motors
•
Closed Circuit Axial Piston
Pumps and Motors
•
Displays
•
Electrohydraulic Power
Steering
•
Electrohydraulics
•
Hydraulic Power Steering
•
Integrated Systems
•
Joysticks and Control
Handles
•
Microcontrollers and
Software
•
Open Circuit Axial Piston
Pumps
•
Orbital Motors
•
PLUS+1
®
GUIDE
•
Proportional Valves
•
Sensors
•
Steering
•
Transit Mixer Drives
Comatrol
www.comatrol.com
Turolla
www.turollaocg.com
Hydro-Gear
www.hydro-gear.com
Daikin-Sauer-Danfoss
www.daikin-sauer-danfoss.com
